Micro Motion Model 1700 1700 transmitter Configuration and Use Manual
Publicitate
Publicitate
Configuration and Use Manual
MMI-20019028, Rev AA
March 2012
Micro Motion
®
Model 1700 Transmitters with
Analog Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
Safety messages
Safety messages are provided throughout this manual to protect personnel and equipment. Read each safety message carefully before proceeding to the next step.
Micro Motion customer service
Location
U.S.A.
Canada and Latin America
Asia
Europe
Japan
All other locations
U.K.
All other locations
Telephone number Email
800-522-MASS (800-522-6277) (toll free) [email protected]
+1 303-527-5200 (U.S.A.)
3 5769-6803
+65 6777-8211 (Singapore)
0870 240 1978 (toll-free)
+31 (0) 318 495 555 (The Netherlands)
Contents
Contents
Part I Getting Started
Chapter 1 Before you begin .............................................................................................................3
Chapter 2 Quick start .......................................................................................................................7
Part II Configuration and commissioning
Chapter 3 Introduction to configuration and commissioning .........................................................19
Chapter 4 Configure process measurement ...................................................................................23
Configure Volume Flow Measurement Unit for liquid applications ................................30
Configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit .............................................36
Configuration and Use Manual
i
Contents
Configure pressure compensation using the Field Communicator ................................ 56
Chapter 5 Configure device options and preferences .....................................................................59
Enable or disable the Acknowledge All Alarms display command ..................................66
Chapter 6 Integrate the meter with the control system ..................................................................81
Configure Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV) ...............................83
Configure mA Output Fault Action and mA Output Fault Level ......................................88
ii
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Contents
Configure Frequency Output Fault Action and Frequency Output Fault Level ................93
Chapter 7 Completing the configuration ......................................................................................113
Part III Operations, maintenance, and troubleshooting
Chapter 8 Transmitter operation .................................................................................................119
Chapter 9 Measurement support .................................................................................................133
Schedule automatic execution of the Smart Meter Verification test ............................143
Configuration and Use Manual
iii
Contents
Alternate method for calculating the meter factor for volume flow .............................153
Perform a D1 and D2 density calibration using the Field Communicator .....................157
Perform a D3 or D3 and D4 density calibration using the Field Communicator ............161
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................167
iv
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Contents
Appendices and reference
Appendix A Using the transmitter display .......................................................................................211
Appendix B Using ProLink II with the transmitter ...........................................................................233
Appendix C Using ProLink III with the transmitter ...........................................................................255
Appendix D Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter .....................................................277
Appendix E Default values and ranges ............................................................................................295
Appendix F Transmitter components and installation wiring .........................................................301
Appendix G NE 53 history ...............................................................................................................307
Index ................................................................................................................................................311
Configuration and Use Manual
v
Contents vi
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Part I
Getting Started
Chapters covered in this part:
•
Before you begin
•
Quick start
Getting Started
Configuration and Use Manual
1
Getting Started
2
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Before you begin
Before you begin
Topics covered in this chapter:
•
About this manual
•
Transmitter model code
•
Communications tools and protocols
•
Additional documentation and resources
About this manual
This manual provides information to help you configure, commission, use, maintain, and troubleshoot the Micro Motion Model 1700 transmitter.
Important
This manual assumes that the transmitter has been installed correctly and completely, according to the instructions in the transmitter installation manual, and that the installation complies with all applicable safety requirements.
Transmitter model code
Your transmitter can be identified by the model number on the transmitter tag.
The transmitter has a model number of the following form:
1700(I/R/C/B)**A******
I
Integral mount
R
4-wire remote-mount
C
9-wire remote-mount
B
Remote core processor with remote transmitter
A
Analog outputs option board
Communications tools and protocols
You can use several different communications tools and protocols to interface with the transmitter. You may use different tools in different locations or for different tasks.
Configuration and Use Manual
3
4
Before you begin
Table 1-1: Communications tools, protocols, and related information
Communications tool
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Supported protocols
Not applicable
• HART/RS-485
• HART/Bell 202
• Modbus/RS-485
• Service port
• HART/RS-485
• HART/Bell 202
• Modbus/RS-485
• Service port
HART/Bell 202
Scope
Basic configuration and commissioning
Complete configuration and commissioning
In this manual
Complete user informa-
Basic user information.
See
Complete configuration and commissioning
Complete configuration and commissioning
Basic user information.
See
Basic user information.
See
.
For more information
Not applicable
User manual
• Installed with software
• On Micro Motion user documentation
CD
• On Micro Motion web site ( www.micromotion.com
User manual
• Installed with software
• On Micro Motion user documentation
CD
• On Micro Motion web site ( www.micromotion.com
User manual on
Micro Motion web site
( www.micromotion.com
1.4
Tip
You may be able to use other communications tools from Emerson Process Management, such as
AMS Suite: Intelligent Device Manager, or the Smart Wireless THUM
™
Adapter. Use of AMS or the
Smart Wireless THUM Adapter is not discussed in this manual. The AMS interface is similar to the
ProLink II interface. For more information on the Smart Wireless THUM Adapter, refer to the documentation available at www.micromotion.com
.
Additional documentation and resources
Micro Motion provides additional documentation to support the installation and operation of the transmitter.
Table 1-2: Additional documentation and resources
Topic
Sensor
Document
Sensor documentation
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Before you begin
Table 1-2: Additional documentation and resources
(continued)
Topic
Transmitter installation
Hazardous area installation
Document
Micro Motion Model 1700 and Model 2700 Transmitters: Installation
Manual
See the approval documentation shipped with the transmitter, or download the appropriate documentation from the Micro Motion web site at www.micromotion.com
.
All documentation resources are available on the Micro Motion web site at www.micromotion.com
or on the Micro Motion user documentation CD.
Configuration and Use Manual
5
Before you begin
6
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
2
2.1
2.2
Quick start
Quick start
Topics covered in this chapter:
•
Power up the transmitter
•
Check flowmeter status
•
Make a startup connection to the transmitter
•
Characterize the flowmeter (if required)
•
Verify mass flow measurement
•
Verify the zero
Power up the transmitter
The transmitter must be powered up for all configuration and commissioning tasks, or for process measurement.
1.
Ensure that all transmitter and sensor covers and seals are closed.
CAUTION!
To prevent ignition of flammable or combustible atmospheres, ensure that all covers and seals are tightly closed. For hazardous area installations, applying power while housing covers are removed or loose can cause an explosion.
2.
Turn on the electrical power at the power supply.
The transmitter will automatically perform diagnostic routines. During this period,
Alarm 009 is active. The diagnostic routines should complete in approximately
30 seconds. For transmitters with a display, the status LED will turn green and begin to flash when the startup diagnostics are complete. If the status LED exhibits different behavior, an alarm condition is present.
Postrequisites
Although the sensor is ready to receive process fluid shortly after power-up, the electronics can take up to 10 minutes to reach thermal equilibrium. Therefore, if this is the initial startup, or if power is been off long enough to allow components to reach ambient temperature, allow the electronics to warm up for approximately 10 minutes before relying on process measurements. During this warm-up period, you may observe minor measurement instability or inaccuracy.
Check flowmeter status
Check the flowmeter for any error conditions that require user action or that affect measurement accuracy.
Configuration and Use Manual
7
Quick start
1.
Wait approximately 10 seconds for the power-up sequence to complete.
Immediately after power-up, the transmitter runs through diagnostic routines and checks for error conditions. During the power-up sequence, Alarm A009 is active.
This alarm should clear automatically when the power-up sequence is complete.
2.
Check the status LED on the transmitter.
Table 2-1: Transmitter status reported by status LED
LED state
Green
Flashing green
(1)
Yellow
Flashing yellow
(2)
Red
Flashing red
(3)
Description
No alarms are active.
No alarms are active. One or more previously active alarms have not been acknowledged.
One or more low-severity alarms are active, and have been acknowledged.
One or more low-severity alarms are active and have not been acknowledged.
One or more high-severity alarms are active, and have been acknowledged.
One or more high-severity alarms are active and have not been acknowledged.
Recommendation
Continue with configuration or process measurement.
Continue with configuration or process measurement. If you choose, you can acknowledge the alarms.
A low-severity alarm condition does not affect measurement accuracy or output behavior.
You can continue with configuration or process measurement. If you choose, you can identify and resolve the alarm condition.
A low-severity alarm condition does not affect measurement accuracy or output behavior.
You can continue with configuration or process measurement. If you choose, you can identify and resolve the alarm condition. You may also acknowledge the alarm.
A high-severity alarm condition affects measurement accuracy and output behavior. Resolve the alarm condition before continuing.
A high-severity alarm condition affects measurement accuracy and output behavior. Resolve the alarm condition before continuing.
You may also acknowledge the alarm.
Postrequisites
For information on viewing the list of active alarms, see
.
For information on individual alarms and suggested resolutions, see
(1) If Status LED Blinking is disabled, the LED will show solid green rather than flashing.
(2) If Status LED Blinking is disabled, the LED will show solid yellow rather than flashing.
(3) If Status LED Blinking is disabled, the LED will show solid red rather than flashing.
8
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
2.3
Quick start
Make a startup connection to the transmitter
For all configuration tools except the display, you must have an active connection to the transmitter to configure the transmitter. Follow this procedure to make your first connection to the transmitter.
Identify the connection type to use, and follow the instructions for that connection type in the appropriate appendix. Use the default communications parameters shown in the appendix.
Communications tool
ProLink II
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Connection type to use
HART/RS-485
HART/RS-485
HART
Instructions
Postrequisites
(Optional) Change the communications parameters to site-specific values.
To change the communications parameters using ProLink II:
• To change the protocol, baud rate, parity, or stop bits, choose ProLink > Configuration >
RS-485
.
• To change the address, choose ProLink > Configuration > Device.
To change the communications parameters using ProLink III, choose Device Tools >
Configuration > Communications.
To change the communications parameters using the Field Communicator, choose On-Line
Menu
> Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Communications.
Important
If you are changing communications parameters for the connection type that you are using, you will lose the connection when you write the parameters to the transmitter. Reconnect using the new parameters.
Configuration and Use Manual
9
Quick start
2.4
2.4.1
10
Characterize the flowmeter (if required)
Display
ProLink II
Not available
•
ProLink
> Configuration > Device > Sensor Type
•
ProLink
> Configuration > Flow
•
ProLink
> Configuration > Density
• ProLink > Configuration > T Series
ProLink III
Device Tools
> Calibration Data
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Characterize
Overview
Characterizing the flowmeter adjusts your transmitter to match the unique traits of the sensor it is paired with. The characterization parameters (also called calibration parameters) describe the sensor’s sensitivity to flow, density, and temperature.
Depending on your sensor type, different parameters are required. Values for your sensor are provided by Micro Motion on the sensor tag or the calibration certificate.
Tip
If your flowmeter was ordered as a unit, it has already been characterized at the factory. However, you should still verify the characterization parameters.
Procedure
1.
Specify Sensor Type.
•
Straight-tube
(T-Series)
•
Curved-tube
(all sensors except T-Series)
2.
Set the flow characterization parameters. Be sure to include all decimal points.
• For straight-tube sensors, set FCF (Flow Cal or Flow Calibration Factor), FTG, and FFQ.
• For curved-tube sensors, set Flow Cal (Flow Calibration Factor).
3.
Set the density characterization parameters.
• For straight-tube sensors, set D1, D2, DT, DTG, K1, K2, FD, DFQ1, and DFQ2.
• For curved-tube sensors, set D1, D2, TC, K1, K2, and FD. (TC is sometimes shown as DT.)
Sources and formats for characterization parameters
Different sensor tags display characterization parameters differently. On older sensors, the sensor tag may not contain all the required parameters.
Sample sensor tags
Sample sensor tags are shown in the following illustrations:
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
•
Older curved-tube sensors (all sensors except T-Series): see
•
Newer curved-tube sensors (all sensors except T-Series): see
•
Older straight-tube sensors (T-Series): see
•
Newer straight-tube sensors (T-Series): see
Figure 2-1: Tag on older curved-tube sensors (all sensors except T-Series)
Quick start
Figure 2-2: Tag on newer curved-tube sensors (all sensors except T-Series)
Configuration and Use Manual
11
Quick start
Figure 2-3: Tag on older straight-tube sensor (T-Series)
Figure 2-4: Tag on newer straight-tube sensor (T-Series)
12
Density calibration parameters (D1, D2, K1, K2, FD, DT, TC)
If your sensor tag does not show a D1 or D2 value:
• For D1, enter the Dens A or D1 value from the calibration certificate. This value is the line-condition density of the low-density calibration fluid. Micro Motion uses air. If you cannot find a Dens A or D1 value, enter 0.001 g/cm
3
.
• For D2, enter the Dens B or D2 value from the calibration certificate. This value is the line-condition density of the high-density calibration fluid. Micro Motion uses water.
If you cannot find a Dens B or D2 value, enter 0.998 g/cm
3
.
If your sensor tag does not show a K1 or K2 value:
• For K1, enter the first 5 digits of the density calibration factor. In the sample tag, this value is shown as 12500 (see
• For K2, enter the second 5 digits of the density calibration factor. In the sample tag,
this value is shown as 14286 (see
).
If your sensor does not show an FD value, contact Micro Motion customer service.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
2.5
Quick start
If your sensor tag does not show a DT or TC value, enter the last 3 digits of the density calibration factor. In the sample tag, this value is shown as 4.44 (see
Flow calibration parameters (FCF, FT)
Two separate values are used to describe flow calibration: a 6-character FCF value and a 4character FT value. Both values contain decimal points. During characterization, these may be entered as two values or as a single 10-character string. The 10-character string is called either Flowcal or FCF.
If your sensor tag shows the FCF and the FT values separately and you need to enter a single value, concatenate the two values to form the single parameter value.
If your sensor tag shows a concatenated Flowcal or FCF value and you need to enter the FCF and the FT values separately, split the concatenated value:
•
FCF
= The first 6 characters, including the decimal point
•
FT
= The last 4 characters, including the decimal point
Example: Concatenating FCF and FT
FCF = x.xxxx
FT = y.yy
Flow calibration parameter: x.xxxxy.yy
Example: Splitting the concatenated Flowcal or FCF value
Flow calibration parameter: x.xxxxy.yy
FCF = x.xxxx
FT = y.yy
Verify mass flow measurement
Check to see that the mass flow rate reported by the transmitter is accurate. You can use any available method.
• Read the value for Mass Flow Rate on the transmitter display.
• Connect to the transmitter with ProLink II and read the value for Mass Flow Rate in the
Process Variables window (ProLink > Process Variables).
• Connect to the transmitter with ProLink III and read the value for Mass Flow Rate in the Process Variables panel.
• Connect to the transmitter with the Field Communicator and read the value for Mass
Flow Rate in the Process Variables menu (On-Line Menu > Overview > Primary Purpose
Variables ).
Postrequisites
If the reported mass flow rate is not accurate:
• Check the characterization parameters.
Configuration and Use Manual
13
Quick start
2.6
2.6.1
14
• Review the troubleshooting suggestions for flow measurement issues. See
Verify the zero
Verifying the zero helps you determine if the stored zero value is appropriate to your installation, or if a field zero can improve measurement accuracy.
The zero verification procedure analyzes the Live Zero value under conditions of zero flow, and compares it to the Zero Stability range for the sensor. If the average Live Zero value is within a reasonable range, the zero value stored in the transmitter is valid. Performing a field calibration will not improve measurement accuracy.
Verify the zero using ProLink II
Verifying the zero helps you determine if the stored zero value is appropriate to your installation, or if a field zero can improve measurement accuracy.
•
•
Important
In most cases, the factory zero is more accurate than the field zero. Do not zero the flowmeter unless one of the following is true:
The zero is required by site procedures.
The stored zero value fails the zero verification procedure.
Prerequisites
ProLink II v2.94 or later
Important
Do not verify the zero or zero the flowmeter if a high-severity alarm is active. Correct the problem, then verify the zero or zero the flowmeter. You may verify the zero or zero the flowmeter if a lowseverity alarm is active.
Procedure
1.
Prepare the flowmeter: a. Allow the flowmeter to warm up for at least 20 minutes after applying power.
b. Run the process fluid through the sensor until the sensor temperature reaches the normal process operating temperature.
c. Stop flow through the sensor by shutting the downstream valve, and then the upstream valve if available.
d. Verify that the sensor is blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full of process fluid.
2.
Choose ProLink > Calibration > Zero Verification and Calibration > Verify Zero and wait until the procedure completes.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
2.6.2
Quick start
3.
If the zero verification procedure fails: a. Confirm that the sensor is completely blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full of process fluid.
b. Verify that the process fluid is not flashing or condensing, and that it does not contain particles that can settle out.
c. Repeat the zero verification procedure.
d. If it fails again, zero the flowmeter.
For instructions on zeroing the flowmeter, see
.
Postrequisites
Restore normal flow through the sensor by opening the valves.
Verify the zero using ProLink III
Verifying the zero helps you determine if the stored zero value is appropriate to your installation, or if a field zero can improve measurement accuracy.
Important
In most cases, the factory zero is more accurate than the field zero. Do not zero the flowmeter unless one of the following is true:
• The zero is required by site procedures.
• The stored zero value fails the zero verification procedure.
Prerequisites
ProLink III v1.0 with Patch Build 31, or a later release
Important
Do not verify the zero or zero the flowmeter if a high-severity alarm is active. Correct the problem, then verify the zero or zero the flowmeter. You may verify the zero or zero the flowmeter if a lowseverity alarm is active.
Procedure
1.
Prepare the flowmeter: a. Allow the flowmeter to warm up for at least 20 minutes after applying power.
b. Run the process fluid through the sensor until the sensor temperature reaches the normal process operating temperature.
c. Stop flow through the sensor by shutting the downstream valve, and then the upstream valve if available.
d. Verify that the sensor is blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full of process fluid.
2.
Choose Device Tools > Device Calibration > Zero Verification and Calibration > Verify Zero and wait until the procedure completes.
Configuration and Use Manual
15
Quick start
3.
If the zero verification procedure fails: a. Confirm that the sensor is completely blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full of process fluid.
b. Verify that the process fluid is not flashing or condensing, and that it does not contain particles that can settle out.
c. Repeat the zero verification procedure.
d. If it fails again, zero the flowmeter.
For instructions on zeroing the flowmeter, see
.
Postrequisites
Restore normal flow through the sensor by opening the valves.
2.6.3
Terminology used with zero verification and zero calibration
Table 2-2: Terminology used with zero verification and zero calibration
Term
Zero
Factory Zero
Field Zero
Prior Zero
Manual Zero
Live Zero
Zero Stability
Zero Calibration
Zero Time
Field Verification Zero
Zero Verification
Definition
In general, the offset required to synchronize the left pickoff and the right pickoff under conditions of zero flow. Unit = microseconds.
The zero value obtained at the factory, under laboratory conditions.
The zero value obtained by performing a zero calibration outside the factory.
The zero value stored in the transmitter at the time a field zero calibration is begun. May be the factory zero or a previous field zero.
The zero value stored in the transmitter, typically obtained from a zero calibration procedure. It may also be configured manually. Also called “mechanical zero” or “stored zero.”
The real-time bidirectional mass flow rate with no flow damping or mass flow cutoff applied. An adaptive damping value is applied only when the mass flow rate changes dramatically over a very short interval. Unit = configured mass flow measurement unit.
A laboratory-derived value used to calculate the expected accuracy for a sensor. Under laboratory conditions at zero flow, the average flow rate is expected to fall within the range defined by the Zero Stability value (0 ± Zero Stability). Each sensor size and model has a unique Zero Stability value. Statistically, 95% of all data points should fall within the range defined by the Zero Stability value.
The procedure used to determine the zero value.
The time period over which the Zero Calibration procedure is performed. Unit = seconds.
A 3-minute running average of the Live Zero value, calculated by the transmitter. Unit = configured mass flow measurement unit.
A procedure used to evaluate the stored zero and determine whether or not a field zero can improve measurement accuracy.
16
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configuration and commissioning
Part II
Configuration and commissioning
Chapters covered in this part:
•
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
•
Configure process measurement
•
Configure device options and preferences
•
Integrate the meter with the control system
•
Completing the configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
17
Configuration and commissioning
18
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
3
3.1
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
Topics covered in this chapter:
•
Configuration flowchart
•
Default values and ranges
•
Enable access to the off-line menu of the display
•
Disable write-protection on the transmitter configuration
•
Restore the factory configuration
Configuration flowchart
Use the following flowchart as a general guide to the configuration and commissioning process.
Some options may not apply to your installation. Detailed information is provided in the remainder of this manual. If you are using the Weights & Measures application, additional configuration and setup are required.
Configuration and Use Manual
19
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
Figure 3-1: Configuration flowchart
Configure process measurement
Configure mass flow measurement
Configure device options and preferences
Configure display parameters
Configure volume flow meaurement
Configure fault handling parameters
Liquid
Volume flow type
Gas
Define gas properties
Configure sensor parameters
Configure device parameters
Configure flow direction
Configure density measurement
Integrate device with control system
Configure the channels
Configure temperature measurement
Configure the mA output(s)
Configure pressure compensation (optional)
Configure the frequency output(s)
Configure the discrete output(s)
Configure events
Configure digital communications
Test and move to production
Test or tune transmitter using sensor simulation
Back up transmitter configuration
Enable write-protection on transmitter configuration
Done
20
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
3.2
3.3
3.4
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
Default values and ranges
See
to view the default values and ranges for the most commonly used parameters.
Enable access to the off-line menu of the display
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT
ProLink
> OFF-LINE CONFG > DISPLAY
> Configuration > Display > Display Options
ProLink III
Device Tools
> Configuration > Transmitter Display > Display Security
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Display > Offline Variable Menu Features
Overview
By default, access to the off-line menu of the display is enabled. If it is disabled, you must enable it if you want to use the display to configure the transmitter.
Restriction
You cannot use the display to enable access to the off-line menu. You must make a connection from another tool.
Disable write-protection on the transmitter configuration
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > CONFG > LOCK
ProLink > Configuration > Device > Enable Write Protection
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Write-Protection
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Info Parameters > Transmitter Info > Write Protect
Overview
If the transmitter is write-protected, the configuration is locked and you must unlock it before you can change any configuration parameters. By default, the transmitter is not write-protected.
Configuration and Use Manual
21
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
3.5
Tip
Write-protecting the transmitter prevents accidental changes to configuration. It does not prevent normal operational use. You can always disable write-protection, perform any required configuration changes, then re-enable write-protection.
Restore the factory configuration
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Device > Restore Factory Configuration
ProLink III
Device Tools
> Configuration Transfer > Restore Factory Configuration
Field Communicator
Not available
Overview
Restoring the factory configuration returns the transmitter to a known operational configuration. This may be useful if you experience problems during configuration.
Tip
Restoring the factory configuration is not a common action. You may want to contact Micro Motion to see if there is a preferred method to resolve any issues.
22
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
4
Configure process measurement
Configure process measurement
Topics covered in this chapter:
•
Configure mass flow measurement
•
Configure volume flow measurement for liquid applications
•
Configure gas standard volume (GSV) flow measurement
•
Configure Flow Direction
•
Configure density measurement
•
Configure temperature measurement
•
Configure pressure compensation
4.1
4.1.1
Configure mass flow measurement
The mass flow measurement parameters control how mass flow is measured and reported.
The mass flow measurement parameters include:
• Mass Flow Measurement Unit
• Flow Damping
•
Mass Flow Cutoff
Configure Mass Flow Measurement Unit
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
OFF-LINE MAINT
> OFF-LINE CONFG > UNITS > MASS
ProLink > Configuration > Flow > Mass Flow Unit
Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Flow > Mass Flow Unit
Overview
Mass Flow Measurement Unit specifies the unit of measure that will be used for the mass flow rate. The unit used for mass total and mass inventory is derived from this unit.
Procedure
Set Mass Flow Measurement Unit to the unit you want to use.
The default setting for Mass Flow Measurement Unit is g/sec (grams per second).
Configuration and Use Manual
23
Configure process measurement
Tip
If the measurement unit you want to use is not available, you can define a special measurement unit.
Options for Mass Flow Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Mass Flow Measurement
Unit , plus one user-defined special measurement unit. Different communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Table 4-1: Options for Mass Flow Measurement Unit
Unit description
Display ProLink II
Label
ProLink III
Grams per second
Grams per minute
Grams per hour
Kilograms per second
Kilograms per minute
Kilograms per hour
Kilograms per day
Metric tons per minute
Metric tons per hour
Metric tons per day
Pounds per second
Pounds per minute
Pounds per hour
Pounds per day
Short tons (2000 pounds) per minute
Short tons (2000 pounds) per hour
Short tons (2000 pounds) per day
Long tons (2240 pounds) per hour
Long tons (2240 pounds) per day
Special unit
ST/H
ST/D
LT/H
LT/D
SPECL
KG/D
T/MIN
T/H
T/D
LB/S
LB/MIN
G/S
G/MIN
G/H
KG/S
KG/MIN
KG/H
LB/H
LB/D
ST/MIN g/sec g/min g/hr kg/sec kg/min kg/hr kg/day mTon/min mTon/hr mTon/day lbs/sec lbs/min lbs/hr lbs/day sTon/min sTon/hr sTon/day lTon/hr lTon/day special g/sec g/min g/hr kg/sec kg/min kg/hr kg/day mTon/min mTon/hr mTon/day lbs/sec lbs/min lbs/hr lbs/day sTon/min sTon/hr sTon/day lTon/hr lTon/day special
Field Communicator
g/s g/min g/h kg/s kg/min kg/h kg/d
MetTon/min
MetTon/h
MetTon/d lb/s lb/min lb/h lb/d
STon/min
STon/h
STon/d
LTon/h
LTon/d
Spcl
24
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure process measurement
Define a special measurement unit for mass flow
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Special Units
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow > Special Units
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Special Units > Mass Special Units
Overview
A special measurement unit is a user-defined unit of measure that allows you to report process data, totalizer data, and inventory data in a unit that is not available in the transmitter. A special measurement unit is calculated from an existing measurement unit using a conversion factor.
Note
Although you cannot define a special measurement unit using the display, you can use the display to select an existing special measurement unit, and to view process data using the special measurement unit.
Procedure
1.
Specify Base Mass Unit.
Base Mass Unit
is the existing mass unit that the special unit will be based on.
2.
Specify Base Time Unit.
Base Time Unit is the existing time unit that the special unit will be based on.
3.
Calculate Mass Flow Conversion Factor as follows: a. x base units = y special units b. Mass Flow Conversion Factor = x/y
4.
Enter Mass Flow Conversion Factor.
5.
Set Mass Flow Label to the name you want to use for the mass flow unit.
6.
Set Mass Total Label to the name you want to use for the mass total and mass inventory unit.
The special measurement unit is stored in the transmitter. You can configure the transmitter to use the special measurement unit at any time.
Example: Defining a special measurement unit for mass flow
You want to measure mass flow in ounces per second (oz/sec).
1.
Set Base Mass Unit to Pounds (lb).
2.
Set Base Time Unit to Seconds (sec).
3.
Calculate Mass Flow Conversion Factor:
Configuration and Use Manual
25
Configure process measurement
4.1.2
a. 1 lb/sec = 16 oz/sec b. Mass Flow Conversion Factor = 1/16 = 0.0625
4.
Set Mass Flow Conversion Factor to 0.0625.
5.
Set Mass Flow Label to oz/sec.
6.
Set Mass Total Label to oz.
Configure Flow Damping
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Flow > Flow Damp
Device Tools
> Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Flow > Flow Damping
Overview
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. Damping
Value specifies the time period (in seconds) over which the transmitter will spread changes in the reported process variable. At the end of the interval, the reported process variable will reflect 63% of the change in the actual measured value.
Procedure
Set Flow Damping to the value you want to use.
The default value is 0.8 seconds. The range depends on the core processor type and the setting of Update Rate, as shown in the following table.
Core processor type
Standard
Enhanced
Update Rate
setting
Normal
Special
Not applicable
Flow Damping
range
0 to 51.2 seconds
0 to 10.24 seconds
0 to 51.2 seconds
Tips
• A high damping value makes the process variable appear smoother because the reported value changes slowly.
• A low damping value makes the process variable appear more erratic because the reported value changes more quickly.
• The combination of a high damping value and rapid, large changes in flow rate can result in increased measurement error.
• Whenever the damping value is non-zero, the reported measurement will lag the actual measurement because the reported value is being averaged over time.
26
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
4.1.3
Configure process measurement
• In general, lower damping values are preferable because there is less chance of data loss, and less lag time between the actual measurement and the reported value.
• For gas applications, Micro Motion recommends setting Flow Damping to 2.56 or higher.
The value you enter is automatically rounded down to the nearest valid value. Valid damping values are shown in the following table.
Table 4-2: Valid values for Flow Damping
Core processor type
Standard
Enhanced
Update Rate
setting
Normal
Special
Not applicable
Valid damping values
0 , 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, ... 51.2
0
, 0.04, 0.08, 0.16, ... 10.24
0
, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, ... 51.2
Effect of Flow Damping on volume measurement
Flow Damping affects volume measurement for liquid volume data. Flow Damping also affects volume measurement for gas standard volume data. The transmitter calculates volume data from the damped mass flow data.
Interaction between Flow Damping and Added Damping
In some circumstances, both Flow Damping and Added Damping are applied to the reported mass flow value.
Flow Damping
controls the rate of change in flow process variables. Added Damping controls the rate of change reported via the mA output. If mA Output Process Variable is set to Mass
Flow Rate
, and both Flow Damping and Added Damping are set to non-zero values, flow damping is applied first, and the added damping calculation is applied to the result of the first calculation.
Configure Mass Flow Cutoff
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Flow > Mass Flow Cutoff
Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Flow > Mass Flow Cutoff
Overview
Mass Flow Cutoff specifies the lowest mass flow rate that will be reported as measured. All mass flow rates below this cutoff will be reported as 0.
Configuration and Use Manual
27
Configure process measurement
Procedure
Set Mass Flow Cutoff to the value you want to use.
The default value for Mass Flow Cutoff is 0.0 g/sec or a sensor-specific value set at the factory. The recommended setting is 0.05% of the sensor's rated maximum flow rate or a value below the highest expected flow rate. Do not set Mass Flow Cutoff to 0.0 g/sec.
Effect of Mass Flow Cutoff on volume measurement
Mass Flow Cutoff
does not affect volume measurement. Volume data is calculated from the actual mass data rather than the reported value.
Interaction between Mass Flow Cutoff and AO Cutoff
Mass Flow Cutoff
defines the lowest mass flow value that the transmitter will report as measured. AO Cutoff defines the lowest flow rate that will be reported via the mA output. If mA Output Process Variable
is set to Mass Flow Rate, the mass flow rate reported via the mA output is controlled by the higher of the two cutoff values.
Mass Flow Cutoff affects all reported values and values used in other transmitter behavior
(e.g., events defined on mass flow).
AO Cutoff affects only mass flow values reported via the mA output.
Example: Cutoff interaction with AO Cutoff lower than Mass Flow Cutoff
•
•
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable : Mass Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Mass Flow Rate
AO Cutoff : 10 g/sec
Mass Flow Cutoff
: 15 g/sec
Result: If the mass flow rate drops below 15 g/sec, mass flow will be reported as 0, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
Example: Cutoff interaction with AO Cutoff higher than Mass Flow Cutoff
•
•
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable
: Mass Flow Rate
•
Frequency Output Process Variable
AO Cutoff : 15 g/sec
Mass Flow Cutoff : 10 g/sec
: Mass Flow Rate
Result:
• If the mass flow rate drops below 15 g/sec but not below 10 g/sec:
The mA output will report zero flow.
28
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
4.2
4.2.1
Configure process measurement
The frequency output will report the actual flow rate, and the actual flow rate will be used in all internal processing.
• If the mass flow rate drops below 10 g/sec, both outputs will report zero flow, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
Configure volume flow measurement for liquid applications
The volume flow measurement parameters control how liquid volume flow is measured and reported.
The volume flow measurement parameters include:
•
Volume Flow Type
• Volume Flow Measurement Unit
•
Volume Flow Cutoff
Restriction
You cannot implement both liquid volume flow and gas standard volume flow at the same time. You must choose one or the other.
Configure Volume Flow Type for liquid applications
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Flow > Vol Flow Type > Liquid Volume
Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > GSV > Volume Flow Type > Liquid
Overview
Volume Flow Type
controls whether liquid or gas standard volume flow measurement will be used.
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Type to Liquid.
Configuration and Use Manual
29
Configure process measurement
4.2.2
Configure Volume Flow Measurement Unit for liquid applications
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > UNITS > VOL
ProLink
> Configuration > Flow > Vol Flow Unit
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Flow > Volume Flow Unit
Overview
Volume Flow Measurement Unit specifies the unit of measurement that will be displayed for the volume flow rate. The unit used for the volume total and volume inventory is based on this unit.
Prerequisites
Before you configure Volume Flow Measurement Unit, be sure that Volume Flow Type is set to
Liquid .
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Measurement Unit to the unit you want to use.
The default setting for Volume Flow Measurement Unit is l/sec (liters per second).
Tip
If the measurement unit you want to use is not available, you can define a special measurement unit.
Options for Volume Flow Measurement Unit for liquid applications
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Volume Flow Measurement
Unit
, plus one user-defined measurement unit. Different communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Table 4-3: Options for Volume Flow Measurement Unit for liquid applications
Unit description
Display ProLink II
Label
ProLink III
Cubic feet per second
Cubic feet per minute
Cubic feet per hour
Cubic feet per day
Cubic meters per second
CUFT/S
CUF/MN
CUFT/H
CUFT/D
M3/S ft3/sec ft3/min ft3/hr ft3/day m3/sec ft3/sec ft3/min ft3/hr ft3/day m3/sec
Field Communicator
Cuft/s
Cuft/min
Cuft/h
Cuft/d
Cum/s
30
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure process measurement
Table 4-3: Options for Volume Flow Measurement Unit for liquid applications
(continued)
Unit description
Display ProLink II
Label
ProLink III
Cubic meters per minute
Cubic meters per hour
Cubic meters per day
U.S. gallons per second
U.S. gallons per minute
U.S. gallons per hour
U.S. gallons per day
Million U.S. gallons per day
Liters per second
Liters per minute
Liters per hour
Million liters per day
Imperial gallons per second
Imperial gallons per minute
Imperial gallons per hour
Imperial gallons per day
Barrels per hour
Beer barrels per hour
Special unit
UKGPM
UKGPH
UKGPD
BBL/S
BBL/MN
BBL/H
BBL/D
BBBL/S
BBBL/MN
BBBL/H
BBBL/D
SPECL
M3/MIN
M3/H
M3/D
USGPS
USGPM
USGPH
USGPD
MILG/D
L/S
L/MIN
L/H
MILL/D
UKGPS
Imp gal/min
Imp gal/hr
Imp gal/day barrels/sec barrels/min barrels/hr barrels/day
Beer barrels/sec
Beer barrels/min
Beer barrels/hr
Beer barrels/day special m3/min m3/hr m3/day
US gal/sec
US gal/min
US gal/hr
US gal/day mil US gal/day l/sec l/min l/hr mil l/day
Imp gal/sec
Imp gal/min
Imp gal/hr
Imp gal/day barrels/sec barrels/min barrels/hr barrels/day
Beer barrels/sec
Beer barrels/min
Beer barrels/hr
Beer barrels/day special m3/min m3/hr m3/day
US gal/sec
US gal/min
US gal/hr
US gal/day mil US gal/day l/sec l/min l/hr mil l/day
Imp gal/sec
Impgal/min
Impgal/h
Impgal/d bbl/s bbl/min bbl/h bbl/d bbbl/s bbbl/min bbbl/h bbbl/d
Spcl gal/h gal/d
MMgal/d
L/s
L/min
L/h
ML/d
Impgal/s
Field Communicator
Cum/min
Cum/h
Cum/d gal/s gal/min
(1) Unit based on oil barrels (42 U.S. gallons).
(2) Unit based on U.S. beer barrels (31 U.S. gallons).
Configuration and Use Manual
31
Configure process measurement
32
Define a special measurement unit for volume flow
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Special Units
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow > Special Units
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Special Units > Volume Special Units
Overview
A special measurement unit is a user-defined unit of measure that allows you to report process data, totalizer data, and inventory data in a unit that is not available in the transmitter. A special measurement unit is calculated from an existing measurement unit using a conversion factor.
Note
Although you cannot define a special measurement unit using the display, you can use the display to select an existing special measurement unit, and to view process data using the special measurement unit.
Procedure
1.
Specify Base Volume Unit.
Base Volume Unit
is the existing volume unit that the special unit will be based on.
2.
Specify Base Time Unit.
Base Time Unit is the existing time unit that the special unit will be based on.
3.
Calculate Volume Flow Conversion Factor as follows: a. x base units = y special units b. Volume Flow Conversion Factor = x/y
4.
Enter Volume Flow Conversion Factor.
5.
Set Volume Flow Label to the name you want to use for the volume flow unit.
6.
Set Volume Total Label to the name you want to use for the volume total and volume inventory unit.
The special measurement unit is stored in the transmitter. You can configure the transmitter to use the special measurement unit at any time.
Example: Defining a special measurement unit for volume flow
You want to measure volume flow in pints per second (pints/sec).
1.
Set Base Volume Unit to Gallons (gal).
2.
Set Base Time Unit to Seconds (sec).
3.
Calculate the conversion factor:
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
4.2.3
Configure process measurement a. 1 gal/sec = 8 pints/sec b. Volume Flow Conversion Factor = 1/8 = 0.1250
4.
Set Volume Flow Conversion Factor to 0.1250.
5.
Set Volume Flow Label to pints/sec.
6.
Set Volume Total Label to pints.
Configure Volume Flow Cutoff
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Flow > Vol Flow Cutoff
Device Tools
> Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Flow > Volume Flow Cutoff
Overview
Volume Flow Cutoff specifies the lowest volume flow rate that will be reported as measured.
All volume flow rates below this cutoff are reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Cutoff to the value you want to use.
The default value for Volume Flow Cutoff is 0.0 l/sec (liters per second). The lower limit is 0.
The upper limit is the sensor’s flow calibration factor, in units of l/sec, multiplied by 0.2.
Interaction between Volume Flow Cutoff and AO Cutoff
Volume Flow Cutoff
defines the lowest liquid volume flow value that the transmitter will report as measured. AO Cutoff defines the lowest flow rate that will be reported via the mA output. If mA Output Process Variable is set to Volume Flow Rate, the volume flow rate reported via the mA output is controlled by the higher of the two cutoff values.
Volume Flow Cutoff affects both the volume flow values reported via the outputs and the volume flow values used in other transmitter behavior (e.g., events defined on the volume flow).
AO Cutoff affects only flow values reported via the mA output.
Example: Cutoff interaction with AO Cutoff lower than Volume Flow Cutoff
•
•
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable : Volume Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Volume Flow Rate
AO Cutoff : 10 l/sec
Volume Flow Cutoff
: 15 l/sec
Configuration and Use Manual
33
Configure process measurement
4.3
Result: If the volume flow rate drops below 15 l/sec, volume flow will be reported as 0, and
0 will be used in all internal processing.
Example: Cutoff interaction with AO Cutoff higher than Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable
: Volume Flow Rate
• Frequency Output Process Variable : Volume Flow Rate
• AO Cutoff : 15 l/sec
• Volume Flow Cutoff : 10 l/sec
Result:
• If the volume flow rate drops below 15 l/sec but not below 10 l/sec:
The mA output will report zero flow.
The frequency output will report the actual flow rate, and the actual flow rate will be used in all internal processing.
• If the volume flow rate drops below 10 l/sec, both outputs will report zero flow, and
0 will be used in all internal processing.
Configure gas standard volume (GSV) flow measurement
The gas standard volume (GSV) flow measurement parameters control how gas standard volume flow is measured and reported.
The GSV flow measurement parameters include:
• Volume Flow Type
•
Standard Gas Density
•
Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit
• Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff
Restriction
You cannot implement both liquid volume flow and gas standard volume flow at the same time. You must choose one or the other.
34
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
4.3.1
4.3.2
Configure process measurement
Configure Volume Flow Type for gas applications
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Flow > Vol Flow Type
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > GSV > Volume Flow Type > Standard Gas Volume
Overview
Volume Flow Type controls whether liquid or gas standard volume flow measurement is used.
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Type to Gas Standard Volume.
Configure Standard Gas Density
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Flow > Std Gas Density
Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > GSV > Gas Ref Density
Overview
The Standard Gas Density value is used to convert the measured flow data to the standard reference values.
Prerequisites
Ensure that Density Measurement Unit is set to the measurement unit you want to use for
Standard Gas Density
.
Procedure
Set Standard Gas Density to the standard reference density of the gas you are measuring.
Note
ProLink II and ProLink III provide a guided method that you can use to calculate the standard density of your gas, if you do not know it.
Configuration and Use Manual
35
Configure process measurement
4.3.3
Configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > UNITS > GSV
ProLink
> Configuration > Flow > Std Gas Vol Flow Unit
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > GSV > GSV Flow Unit
Overview
Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit specifies the unit of measure that will be displayed for the gas standard volume flow rate. The measurement unit used for the gas standard volume total and the gas standard volume inventory is derived from this unit.
Prerequisites
Before you configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit, be sure that Volume Flow Type is set to Gas Standard Volume.
Procedure
Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit to the unit you want to use.
The default setting for Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit is SCFM (Standard Cubic
Feet per Minute).
Tip
If the measurement unit you want to use is not available, you can define a special measurement unit.
Options for Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Gas Standard Volume Flow
Measurement Unit
, plus one user-defined special measurement unit. Different communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Table 4-4: Options for Gas Standard Volume Measurement Unit
Unit description
Display ProLink II
Label
ProLink III
Nm3/sec Nm3/sec
Field Communicator
Nm3/sec Normal cubic meters per second
NM3/S
Normal cubic meters per minute
Normal liter per second
NM3/MN
Normal cubic meters per hour NM3/H
Normal cubic meters per day NM3/D
NLPS
Nm3/min
Nm3/hr
Nm3/day
NLPS
Nm3/sec
Nm3/hr
Nm3/day
NLPS
Nm3/min
Nm3/hr
Nm3/day
NLPS
36
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure process measurement
Table 4-4: Options for Gas Standard Volume Measurement Unit
(continued)
Unit description
Display ProLink II
Label
ProLink III
Normal liter per minute NLPM
Normal liter per hour
Normal liter per day
NLPH
NLPD
Standard cubic feet per second SCFS
Standard cubic feet per minute SCFM
Standard cubic feet per hour SCFH
Standard cubic feet per day SCFD
SM3/S
Standard cubic meters per second
Standard cubic meters per minute
SM3/MN
Standard cubic meters per hour
Standard cubic meters per day SM3/D
Standard liter per second SLPS
Standard liter per minute
Standard liter per hour
SM3/H
SLPM
SLPH
Standard liter per day SLPD
Special measurement unit
SPECL
NLPM
NLPH
NLPD
SCFS
SCFM
SCFH
SCFD
Sm3/S
Sm3/min
Sm3/hr
Sm3/day
SLPS
SLPM
SLPH
SLPD special
NLPM
NLPH
NLPD
SCFS
SCFM
SCFH
SCFD
Sm3/sec
Sm3/min
Sm3/hr
Sm3/day
SLPS
SLPM
SLPH
SLPD special
Define a special measurement unit for gas standard volume flow
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Special Units
Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow > Special Units
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Special Units > Special GSV Units
Overview
A special measurement unit is a user-defined unit of measure that allows you to report process data, totalizer data, and inventory data in a unit that is not available in the transmitter. A special measurement unit is calculated from an existing measurement unit using a conversion factor.
Sm3/min
Sm3/hr
Sm3/day
SLPS
SLPM
SLPH
SLPD
Special
Field Communicator
NLPM
NLPH
NLPD
SCFS
SCFM
SCFH
SCFD
Sm3/sec
Configuration and Use Manual
37
Configure process measurement
Note
Although you cannot define a special measurement unit using the display, you can use the display to select an existing special measurement unit, and to view process data using the special measurement unit.
Procedure
1.
Specify Base Gas Standard Volume Unit.
Base Gas Standard Volume Unit is the existing gas standard volume unit that the special unit will be based on.
2.
Specify Base Time Unit.
Base Time Unit is the existing time unit that the special unit will be based on.
3.
Calculate Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor as follows: a. x base units = y special units b. Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor = x/y
4.
Enter the Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor.
5.
Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Label to the name you want to use for the gas standard volume flow unit.
6.
Set Gas Standard Volume Total Label to the name you want to use for the gas standard volume total and gas standard volume inventory unit.
The special measurement unit is stored in the transmitter. You can configure the transmitter to use the special measurement unit at any time.
Example: Defining a special measurement unit for gas standard volume flow
You want to measure gas standard volume flow in thousands of standard cubic feet per minute.
1.
Set Base Gas Standard Volume Unit to SCFM.
2.
Set Base Time Unit to minutes (min).
3.
Calculate the conversion factor: a. 1 thousands of standard cubic feet per minute = 1000 cubic feet per minute b. Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor = 1/1000 = 0.001
4.
Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor to 0.001.
5.
Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Label to KSCFM.
6.
Set Gas Standard Volume Total Label to KSCF.
38
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
4.3.4
Configure process measurement
Configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Flow > Std Gas Vol Flow Cutoff
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > GSV > GSV Cutoff
Overview
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff specifies the lowest gas standard volume flow rate that will reported as measured. All gas standard volume flow rates below this cutoff will be reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff to the value you want to use.
The default value for Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff is 0.0. The lower limit is 0.0. There is no upper limit.
Interaction between Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff and
AO Cutoff
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff defines the lowest Gas Standard Volume flow value that the transmitter will report as measured. AO Cutoff defines the lowest flow rate that will be reported via the mA output. If mA Output Process Variable is set to Gas Standard Volume Flow
Rate , the volume flow rate reported via the mA output is controlled by the higher of the two cutoff values.
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff
affects both the gas standard volume flow values reported via outputs and the gas standard volume flow values used in other transmitter behavior
(e.g., events defined on gas standard volume flow).
AO Cutoff affects only flow values reported via the mA output.
Example: Cutoff interaction with AO Cutoff lower than Gas Standard Volume Flow
Cutoff
•
•
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable
for the primary mA output: Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
•
Frequency Output Process Variable
AO Cutoff
: Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
for the primary mA output: 10 SLPM (standard liters per minute)
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff : 15 SLPM
Result: If the gas standard volume flow rate drops below 15 SLPM, the volume flow will be reported as 0, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
Configuration and Use Manual
39
Configure process measurement
4.4
Example: Cutoff interaction with AO Cutoff higher than Gas Standard Volume Flow
Cutoff
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable
for the primary mA output: Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
•
Frequency Output Process Variable
: Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
• AO Cutoff for the primary mA output: 15 SLPM (standard liters per minute)
• Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff : 10 SLPM
Result:
• If the gas standard volume flow rate drops below 15 SLPM but not below 10 SLPM:
The primary mA output will report zero flow.
The frequency output will report the actual flow rate, and the actual flow rate will be used in all internal processing.
• If the gas standard volume flow rate drops below 10 SLPM, both outputs will report zero flow, and 0 will be used in all internal processing.
Configure Flow Direction
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Flow > Flow Direction
ProLink III
Device Tools
> Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Flow > Flow Direction
Overview
Flow Direction
controls how forward flow and reverse flow affect flow measurement and reporting.
Flow Direction is defined with respect to the flow arrow on the sensor:
• Forward flow (positive flow) moves in the direction of the flow arrow on the sensor.
• Reverse flow (negative flow) moves in the direction opposite to the flow arrow on the sensor.
Tip
Micro Motion sensors are bidirectional. Measurement accuracy is not affected by actual flow direction or the setting of the Flow Direction parameter.
Procedure
Set Flow Direction to the value you want to use.
40
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure process measurement
4.4.1
Options for Flow Direction
Table 4-5: Options for Flow Direction
ProLink II
Flow Direction
setting
ProLink III Field Communicator
Forward Forward Forward
Reverse
Absolute Value
Bidirectional
Negate Forward
Negate Bidirectional
Reverse
Absolute Value
Bidirectional
Negate Forward
Negate Bidirectional
Reverse
Absolute Value
Bi directional
Negate/Forward Only
Negate/Bi-directional
Relationship to Flow Direction arrow on sensor
Appropriate when the Flow Direction arrow is in the same direction as the majority of flow.
Appropriate when the Flow Direction arrow is in the same direction as the majority of flow.
Flow Direction arrow is not relevant.
Appropriate when both forward and reverse flow are expected, and forward flow will dominate, but the amount of reverse flow will be significant.
Appropriate when the Flow Direction arrow is in the opposite direction from the majority of flow.
Appropriate when both forward and reverse flow are expected, and reverse flow will dominate, but the amount of forward flow will be significant.
Effect of Flow Direction on mA outputs
Flow Direction
affects how the transmitter reports flow values via the mA outputs. The mA outputs are affected by Flow Direction only if mA Output Process Variable is set to a flow variable.
•
•
Flow Direction and mA outputs
The effect of Flow Direction on the mA outputs depend on Lower Range Value configured for the mA output:
If Lower Range Value is set to 0, see
If Lower Range Value is set to a negative value, see
.
Configuration and Use Manual
41
Configure process measurement
Figure 4-1: Effect of Flow Direction on the mA output: Lower Range Value = 0
Flow Direction = Forward
20
12
4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
Flow Direction = Reverse, Negate Forward
20
Flow Direction = Absolute Value, Bidirectional,
Negate Bidirectional
20
12
4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
12
4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
•
•
Lower Range Value
= 0
Upper Range Value
= x
Figure 4-2: Effect of Flow Direction on the mA output: Lower Range Value < 0
Flow Direction = Forward
20
12
4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
Flow Direction = Reverse, Negate Forward
20
Flow Direction = Absolute Value, Bidirectional,
Negate Bidirectional
20
12
4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
12
4
-x
Reverse flow
0 x
Forward flow
•
•
Lower Range Value
= −x
Upper Range Value
= x
Example: Flow Direction = Forward and Lower Range Value = 0
Configuration:
•
Flow Direction
= Forward
•
Lower Range Value
= 0 g/sec
•
Upper Range Value
= 100 g/sec
Result:
42
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure process measurement
• Under conditions of reverse flow or zero flow, the mA output is 4 mA.
• Under conditions of forward flow, up to a flow rate of 100 g/sec, the mA output varies between 4 mA and 20 mA in proportion to the flow rate.
• Under conditions of forward flow, if the flow rate equals or exceeds 100 g/sec, the mA output will be proportional to the flow rate up to 20.5 mA, and will be level at
20.5 mA at higher flow rates.
Example: Flow Direction = Forward and Lower Range Value < 0
Configuration:
• Flow Direction = Forward
• Lower Range Value =
−100 g/sec
• Upper Range Value = +100 g/sec
Result:
• Under conditions of zero flow, the mA output is 12 mA.
• Under conditions of forward flow, for flow rates between 0 and +100 g/sec, the mA output varies between 12 mA and 20 mA in proportion to (the absolute value of) the flow rate.
• Under conditions of forward flow, if (the absolute value of) the flow rate equals or exceeds 100 g/sec, the mA output is proportional to the flow rate up to 20.5 mA, and will be level at 20.5 mA at higher flow rates.
• Under conditions of reverse flow, for flow rates between 0 and −100 g/sec, the mA output varies between 4 mA and 12 mA in inverse proportion to the absolute value of the flow rate.
• Under conditions of reverse flow, if the absolute value of the flow rate equals or exceeds 100 g/sec, the mA output is inversely proportional to the flow rate down to
3.8 mA, and will be level at 3.8 mA at higher absolute values.
Example: Flow Direction = Reverse
Configuration:
• Flow Direction = Reverse
•
Lower Range Value
= 0 g/sec
•
Upper Range Value
= 100 g/sec
Result:
• Under conditions of forward flow or zero flow, the mA output is 4 mA.
• Under conditions of reverse flow, for flow rates between 0 and +100 g/sec, the mA output level varies between 4 mA and 20 mA in proportion to the absolute value of the flow rate.
• Under conditions of reverse flow, if the absolute value of the flow rate equals or exceeds 100 g/sec, the mA output will be proportional to the absolute value of the flow rate up to 20.5 mA, and will be level at 20.5 mA at higher absolute values.
Configuration and Use Manual
43
Configure process measurement
Effect of Flow Direction on frequency outputs
Flow Direction affects how the transmitter reports flow values via the frequency outputs. The frequency outputs are affected by Flow Direction only if Frequency Output Process Variable is set to a flow variable.
Table 4-6: Effect of the Flow Direction parameter and actual flow direction on frequency outputs
Flow Direction
setting Actual flow direction
Forward
Reverse
Bidirectional
Absolute Value
Negate Forward
Negate Bidirectional
Forward
Hz > 0
0 Hz
Hz > 0
Hz > 0
0 Hz
Hz > 0
Zero flow
0 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
Reverse
0 Hz
Hz > 0
Hz > 0
Hz > 0
Hz > 0
Hz > 0
Effect of Flow Direction on discrete outputs
The Flow Direction parameter affects the discrete output behavior only if Discrete Output
Source
is set to Flow Direction.
Table 4-7: Effect of the Flow Direction parameter and actual flow direction on discrete outputs
Flow Direction
setting
Forward
Reverse
Bidirectional
Absolute Value
Negate Forward
Negate Bidirectional
Forward
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Actual flow direction
Zero flow
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reverse
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Effect of Flow Direction on digital communications
Flow Direction
affects how flow values are reported via digital communications.
44
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure process measurement
Table 4-8: Effect of the Flow Direction parameter and actual flow direction on flow values reported via digital communications
Flow Direction
setting
Forward
Reverse
Bidirectional
Absolute Value
Negate Forward
Negate Bidirectional
Forward
Positive
Positive
Positive
Positive
Negative
Negative
Actual flow direction
0
0
0
0
0
Zero flow
0
Reverse
Negative
Negative
Negative
Positive
Positive
Positive
Effect of Flow Direction on flow totals
Flow Direction
affects how flow totals and inventories are calculated.
Table 4-9: Effect of the Flow Direction parameter and actual flow direction on flow totals and inventories
Flow Direction
setting
Forward
Reverse
Bidirectional
Absolute Value
Negate Forward
Negate Bidirectional
Actual flow direction
Forward
Totals increase
Zero flow
Totals do not change
Totals do not change Totals do not change
Totals increase Totals do not change
Totals increase Totals do not change
Totals do not change Totals do not change
Totals decrease Totals do not change
Reverse
Totals do not change
Totals increase
Totals decrease
Totals increase
Totals increase
Totals increase
4.5
Configure density measurement
The density measurement parameters control how density is measured and reported.
Density measurement (along with mass measurement) is used to determine liquid volume flow.
The density measurement parameters include:
• Density Measurement Unit
• Slug Flow Parameters
•
Density Damping
•
Density Cutoff
(3) Refer to the digital communications status bits for an indication of whether flow is positive or negative.
Configuration and Use Manual
45
Configure process measurement
4.5.1
Configure Density Measurement Unit
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > UNITS > DENS
ProLink
> Configuration > Density > Dens Unit
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Density
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Density > Density Unit
Overview
Density Measurement Unit specifies the units of measure that will be displayed for density measurement.
Procedure
Set Density Measurement Unit to the option you want to use.
The default setting for Density Measurement Unit is g/cm3 (grams per cubic centimeter).
Options for Density Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Density Measurement Unit.
Different communications tools may use different labels.
Table 4-10: Options for Density Measurement Unit
Unit description
Display ProLink II
Label
ProLink III
SGU SGU
Field Communicator
SGU
Specific gravity unit (not temperature-corrected)
Grams per cubic centimeter
Grams per liter
Grams per milliliter
Kilograms per liter
Kilograms per cubic meter
Pounds per U.S. gallon
Pounds per cubic foot
Pounds per cubic inch
API gravity
Short ton per cubic yard
SGU
G/CM3
G/L
G/mL
KG/L
KG/M3
LB/GAL
LB/CUF
LB/CUI
D API
ST/CUY g/cm3 g/l g/ml kg/l kg/m3 lbs/Usgal lbs/ft3 lbs/in3 degAPI sT/yd3 g/cm3 g/l g/ml kg/l kg/m3 lbs/Usgal lbs/ft3 lbs/in3 degAPI sT/yd3 g/Cucm g/L g/mL kg/L kg/Cum lb/gal lb/Cuft lb/CuIn degAPI
STon/Cuyd
46
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure process measurement
4.5.2
Configure slug flow parameters
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
•
ProLink
> Configuration > Density > Slug High Limit
•
ProLink
> Configuration > Density > Slug Low Limit
•
ProLink
> Configuration > Density > Slug Duration
Device Tools
> Configuration > Process Measurement > Density
Field Communicator • Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Density > Slug Low Limit
• Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Density > Slug High Limit
•
Configure
> Manual Setup > Measurements > Density > Slug Duration
Overview
The slug flow parameters control how the transmitter detects and reports two-phase flow
(gas in a liquid process or liquid in a gas process).
Procedure
1.
Set Slug Low Limit to the lowest density value that is considered normal in your process.
Values below this will cause the transmitter to perform the configured slug flow action. Typically, this value is the lowest density value in the normal range of your process.
Tip
Gas entrainment can cause your process density to drop temporarily. To reduce the occurrence of slug flow alarms that are not significant to your process, set Slug Low Limit slightly below your expected lowest process density.
You must enter Slug Low Limit in g/cm
3
, even if you configured another unit for density measurement.
The default value for Slug Low Limit is 0.0 g/cm
3
. The range is 0.0 to 10.0 g/cm
3
.
2.
Set Slug High Limit to the highest density value that is considered normal in your process.
Values above this will cause the transmitter to perform the configured slug flow action. Typically, this value is the highest density value in the normal range of your process.
Tip
To reduce the occurrence of slug flow alarms that are not significant to your process, set Slug
High Limit slightly above your expected highest process density.
You must enter Slug High Limit in g/cm
3
, even if you configured another unit for density measurement.
Configuration and Use Manual
47
Configure process measurement
4.5.3
The default value for Slug High Limit is 5.0 g/cm
3
. The range is 0.0 to 10.0 g/cm
3
.
3.
Set Slug Duration to the number of seconds that the transmitter will wait for a slug flow condition to clear before performing the configured slug flow action.
The default value for Slug Duration is 0.0 seconds. The range is 0.0 to 60.0 seconds.
Slug flow detection and reporting
Slug flow is typically used as an indicator of two-phase flow (gas in a liquid process or liquid in a gas process). Two-phase flow can cause a variety of process control issues. By configuring the slug flow parameters appropriately for your application, you can detect process conditions that require correction.
Tip
To decrease the occurrence of slug flow alarms, lower Slug Low Limit or raise Slug High Limit.
•
•
A slug flow condition occurs whenever the measured density goes below Slug Low Limit or above Slug High Limit. If this occurs:
A slug flow alarm is posted to the active alarm log.
All outputs that are configured to represent flow rate hold their last “pre-slug flow” value for the configured Slug Duration.
If the slug flow condition clears before Slug Duration expires:
•
•
Outputs that represent flow rate revert to reporting actual flow.
The slug flow alarm is deactivated, but remains in the active alarm log until it is acknowledged.
If the slug flow condition does not clear before Slug Duration expires, the outputs that represent flow rate report a flow rate of 0.
If Slug Duration is set to 0.0 seconds, the outputs that represent flow rate will report a flow rate of 0 as soon as slug flow is detected.
Configure Density Damping
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Density > Density Damping
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Density
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Density > Density Damping
48
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure process measurement
Overview
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. Damping
Value specifies the time period (in seconds) over which the transmitter will spread changes in the reported process variable. At the end of the interval, the reported process variable will reflect 63% of the change in the actual measured value.
Procedure
Set Density Damping to the value you want to use.
The default value is 1.6 seconds. The range depends on the core processor type and the setting of Update Rate, as shown in the following table:
Core processor type
Standard
Enhanced
Update Rate
setting
Normal
Special
Not applicable
Density Damping
range
0 to 51.2 seconds
0 to 10.24 seconds
0 to 40.96 seconds
Tips
• A high damping value makes the process variable appear smoother because the reported value changes slowly.
• A low damping value makes the process variable appear more erratic because the reported value changes more quickly.
• Whenever the damping value is non-zero, the reported measurement will lag the actual measurement because the reported value is being averaged over time.
• In general, lower damping values are preferable because there is less chance of data loss, and less lag time between the actual measurement and the reported value.
The value you enter is automaticaly rounded down to the nearest valid value. The valid values for Density Damping depend on the setting of Update Rate.
Table 4-11: Valid values for Density Damping
Core processor type
Standard
Enhanced
Update Rate
setting
Normal
Special
Not applicable
Valid damping values
0 , 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, ... 51.2
0
, 0.04, 0.08, 0.16, ... 10.24
0 , 0.04, 0.08, 0.16, ... 40.96
Effect of Density Damping on volume measurement
Density Damping affects liquid volume measurement. Liquid volume values are calculated from the damped density value rather than the measured density value. Density Damping does not affect gas standard volume measurement.
Configuration and Use Manual
49
Configure process measurement
4.5.4
4.6
Interaction between Density Damping and Added Damping
In some circumstances, both Density Damping and Added Damping are applied to the reported density value.
Density Damping
controls the rate of change in the density process variable. Added Damping controls the rate of change reported via the mA output. If mA Output Process Variable is set to
Density
, and both Density Damping and Added Damping are set to non-zero values, density damping is applied first, and the added damping calculation is applied to the result of the first calculation.
Configure Density Cutoff
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Density > Low Density Cutoff
Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Density
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Density > Density Cutoff
Overview
Density Cutoff specifies the lowest density value that will be reported as measured. All density values below this cutoff will be reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Density Cutoff to the value you want to use.
The default value for Density Cutoff is 0.2 g/cm
3
. The range is 0.0 g/cm
3
to 0.5 g/cm
3
.
Effect of Density Cutoff on volume measurement
Density Cutoff
affects liquid volume measurement. If the density value goes below Density
Cutoff
, the volume flow rate is reported as 0. Density Cutoff does not affect gas standard volume measurement. Gas standard volume values are always calculated from the value configured for Standard Gas Density.
Configure temperature measurement
The temperature measurement parameters control how temperature data from the sensor is reported. Temperature data is used to compensate for the effect of temperature on the sensor tubes during flow measurement .
The temperature measurement parameters include:
•
Temperature Measurement Unit
• Temperature Damping
50
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
4.6.1
4.6.2
Configure process measurement
Configure Temperature Measurement Unit
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > UNITS > TEMP
ProLink
> Configuration > Temperature > Temp Unit
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Temperature
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Temperature > Temperature Unit
Overview
Temperature Measurement Unit specifies the unit that will be used for temperature measurement.
Procedure
Set Temperature Measurement Unit to the option you want to use.
The default setting is Degrees Celsius.
Options for Temperature Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of units for Temperature Measurement Unit. Different communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Table 4-12: Options for Temperature Measurement Unit
Label
Unit description
Degrees Celsius
Degrees Fahrenheit
Degrees Rankine
Kelvin
Display
°C
°F
°R
°K
ProLink II
degC degF degR degK
ProLink III
°C
°F
°R
°K
Field Communicator
degC degF degR
Kelvin
Configure Temperature Damping
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Temperature > Temp Damping
Device Tools > Configuration > Temperature
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Temperature > Temp Damping
Configuration and Use Manual
51
Configure process measurement
4.7
4.7.1
Overview
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. Damping
Value specifies the time period (in seconds) over which the transmitter will spread changes in the reported process variable. At the end of the interval, the reported process variable will reflect 63% of the change in the actual measured value.
Procedure
Enter the value you want to use for Temperature Damping.
The default value is 4.8 seconds. The range is 0.0 to 76.8 seconds.
Tips
• A high damping value makes the process variable appear smoother because the reported value changes slowly.
• A low damping value makes the process variable appear more erratic because the reported value changes more quickly.
• Whenever the damping value is non-zero, the reported measurement will lag the actual measurement because the reported value is being averaged over time.
• In general, lower damping values are preferable because there is less chance of data loss, and less lag time between the actual measurement and the reported value.
The value you enter is automaticaly rounded down to the nearest valid value. Valid values for Temperature Damping are 0, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, … 76.8.
Effect of Temperature Damping on process measurement
Temperature Damping affects the response speed for temperature compensation with fluctuating temperatures. Temperature compensation adjusts the process measurement to compensate for the effect of temperature on the sensor tube.
Configure pressure compensation
Pressure compensation adjusts process measurement to compensate for the pressure effect on the sensor. The pressure effect is the change in the sensor’s sensitivity to flow and density caused by the difference between the calibration pressure and the process pressure.
Tip
Not all sensors or applications require pressure compensation. The pressure effect for a specific sensor model can be found in the product data sheet located at www.micromotion.com
. If you are uncertain about implementing pressure compensation, contact Micro Motion customer service.
Configure pressure compensation using ProLink II
52
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure process measurement
Prerequisites
You will need the flow factor, density factor, and calibration pressure values for your sensor.
• For the flow factor and density factor, see the product data sheet for your sensor.
• For the calibration pressure, see the calibration sheet for your sensor. If the data is unavailable, use 20 PSI.
Procedure
1.
Choose View > Preferences and ensure that Enable External Pressure Compensation is checked.
2.
Choose ProLink > Configuration > Pressure.
3.
Enter Flow Factor for your sensor.
The flow factor is the percent change in the flow rate per PSI. When entering the value, reverse the sign.
Example:
If the flow factor is 0.000004 % per PSI, enter
−0.000004 % per PSI.
4.
Enter Density Factor for your sensor.
The density factor is the change in fluid density, in g/cm
3 value, reverse the sign.
/PSI. When entering the
Example:
If the density factor is 0.000006 g/cm
3
/PSI, enter
−0.000006 g/cm3/PSI.
5.
Enter Cal Pressure for your sensor.
The calibration pressure is the pressure at which your sensor was calibrated, and defines the pressure at which there is no pressure effect. If the data is unavailable, enter 20 PSI.
6.
Determine how the transmitter will obtain pressure data, and perform the required setup.
Option
A user-configured static pressure value
Setup
a. Set Pressure Units to the desired unit.
b. Set External Pressure to the desired value.
Configuration and Use Manual
53
Configure process measurement
4.7.2
Option Setup
Polling for pressure
a. Ensure that the primary mA output has been wired to support
HART polling.
b. Choose ProLink > Configuration > Polled Variables.
c. Choose an unused polling slot.
d. Set Polling Control to Poll As Primary or Poll as Secondary, and click
Apply .
e. Set External Tag to the HART tag of the external pressure device.
f. Set Variable Type to Pressure.
Tip
• Poll as Primary : No other HART masters will be on the network.
• Poll as Secondary : Other HART masters will be on the network.
The Field Communicator is not a HART master.
A value written by digital communications
a. Set Pressure Units to the desired unit.
b. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write pressure data to the transmitter at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
If you are using an external pressure value, verify the setup by choosing ProLink > Process
Variables and checking the value displayed in External Pressure.
Configure pressure compensation using ProLink III
Prerequisites
You will need the flow factor, density factor, and calibration pressure values for your sensor.
• For the flow factor and density factor, see the product data sheet for your sensor.
• For the calibration pressure, see the calibration sheet for your sensor. If the data is unavailable, use 20 PSI.
Procedure
1.
Choose Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Pressure Compensation.
2.
Set Pressure Compensation Status to Enabled.
3.
Enter Flow Calibration Pressure for your sensor.
The calibration pressure is the pressure at which your sensor was calibrated, and defines the pressure at which there is no pressure effect. If the data is unavailable, enter 20 PSI.
4.
Enter Flow Factor for your sensor.
54
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure process measurement
The flow factor is the percent change in the flow rate per PSI. When entering the value, reverse the sign.
Example:
If the flow factor is 0.000004 % per PSI, enter
−0.000004 % per PSI.
5.
Enter Density Factor for your sensor.
The density factor is the change in fluid density, in g/cm
3 value, reverse the sign.
/PSI. When entering the
Example:
If the density factor is 0.000006 g/cm
3
/PSI, enter
−0.000006 g/cm3/PSI.
6.
Set Pressure Source to the method that the transmitter will use to obtain pressure data.
Option
Poll for external value
Description
The transmitter will poll an external pressure device, using
HART protocol over the primary mA output.
Static or Digital Communications The transmitter will use the pressure value that it reads from memory.
• Static: The configured value is used.
• Digital Communications: A host writes transmitter data to transmitter memory.
7.
If you chose to poll for pressure data: a. Select the Polling Slot to use.
The transmitter has two polling slots. You can use one for pressure and the other for temperature, if concentration measurement or petroleum measurement is enabled.
b. Set Polling Control to Poll as Primary or Poll as Secondary, and click Apply.
Tip
• Poll as Primary : No other HART masters will be on the network.
•
Poll as Secondary
: Other HART masters will be on the network. The Field Communicator is not a HART master.
c. Set External Device Tag to the HART tag of the external pressure device, and click
Apply
.
8.
If you chose to use a static pressure value: a. Set Pressure Unit to the desired unit.
b. Set Static or Current Pressure to the value to use, and click Apply
Configuration and Use Manual
55
Configure process measurement
4.7.3
56
9.
If you want to use digital communications, click Apply, then perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write temperature data to the transmitter at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
If you are using an external pressure value, verify the setup by checking the External Pressure value displayed in the Inputs area of the main window.
Configure pressure compensation using the
Field Communicator
Prerequisites
You will need the flow factor, density factor, and calibration pressure values for your sensor.
• For the flow factor and density factor, see the product data sheet for your sensor.
• For the calibration pressure, see the calibration sheet for your sensor. If the data is unavailable, use 20 PSI.
Procedure
1.
Choose Online > Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > External Pressure/Temperature >
Pressure .
2.
Set Pressure Compensation to Enabled.
3.
Enter Flow Cal Pressure for your sensor.
The calibration pressure is the pressure at which your sensor was calibrated, and defines the pressure at which there is no pressure effect. If the data is unavailable, enter 20 PSI.
4.
Enter Flow Press Factor for your sensor.
The flow factor is the percent change in the flow rate per PSI. When entering the value, reverse the sign.
Example:
If the flow factor is 0.000004 % per PSI, enter
−0.000004 % per PSI.
5.
Enter Dens Press Factor for your sensor.
The density factor is the change in fluid density, in g/cm
3 value, reverse the sign.
/PSI. When entering the
Example:
If the density factor is 0.000006 g/cm
3
/PSI, enter
−0.000006 g/cm3/PSI.
6.
Determine how the transmitter will obtain pressure data, and perform the required setup.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure process measurement
Option
A user-configured static pressure value
Setup
a. Set Pressure Unit to the desired unit.
b. Set Compensation Pressure to the desired value.
Polling for pressure
a. Ensure that the primary mA output has been wired to support
HART polling.
b. Choose Online > Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > External
Pressure/Temperature
> External Polling.
c. Set Poll Control to Poll As Primary Host or Poll as Secondary Host.
d. Choose an unused polling slot.
e. Set External Tag to the HART tag of the external pressure device.
f. Set Polled Variable to Pressure.
Tip
• Poll as Primary : No other HART masters will be on the network.
•
Poll as Secondary
: Other HART masters will be on the network.
The Field Communicator is not a HART master.
A value written by digital communications
a. Set Pressure Unit to the desired unit.
b. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup to write pressure data to the transmitter at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
If you are using an external pressure value, verify the setup by choosing Service Tools >
Variables
> External Variables and checking the value displayed for External Pressure.
4.7.4
Options for Pressure Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Pressure Measurement Unit.
Different communications tools may use different labels for the units. In most applications, Pressure Measurement Unit should be set to match the pressure measurement unit used by the remote device.
Table 4-13: Options for Pressure Measurement Unit
Unit description
Display ProLink II
Label
ProLink III
Feet water @ 68 °F
Inches water @ 4 °C
Inches water @ 60 °F
Inches water @ 68 °F
Millimeters water @ 4 °C
FTH2O
INW4C
INW60
INH2O mmW4C
Ft Water @ 68°F
In Water @ 4°C
In Water @ 60°F
In Water @ 68°F mm Water @ 4°C
Ft Water @ 68°F
In Water @ 4°C
In Water @ 60°F
In Water @ 68°F mm Water @ 4°C
Field Communicator
ftH2O inH2O @4DegC inH2O @60DegF inH2O mmH2O @4DegC
Configuration and Use Manual
57
Configure process measurement
Table 4-13: Options for Pressure Measurement Unit
(continued)
Unit description
Display ProLink II
Label
ProLink III
Millimeters water @ 68 °F
Atmospheres mmH2O
Millimeters mercury @ 0 °C
Inches mercury @ 0 °C
Pounds per square inch mmHG
INHG
PSI
Bar
Millibar
BAR mBAR
Grams per square centimeter G/SCM
Kilograms per square centimeter
KG/SCM
Pascals PA
KPA
Kilopascals
Megapascals
Torr @ 0 °C
MPA
TORR
ATM mm Water @ 68°F mm Water @ 68°F mm Mercury @ 0°C mm Mercury @ 0°C
In Mercury @ 0°C
In Mercury @ 0°C
PSI PSI bar bar millibar g/cm2 kg/cm2 millibar g/cm2 kg/cm2 pascals
Kilopascals megapascals
Torr @ 0°C atms pascals
Kilopascals
Megapascals
Torr @ 0°C atms
Pa kPa
MPa torr atms
Field Communicator
mmH2O mmHg inHG psi bar mbar g/Sqcm kg/Sqcm
58
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure device options and preferences
5
5.1
5.1.1
Configure device options and preferences
Topics covered in this chapter:
•
Configure the transmitter display
•
Enable or disable operator actions from the display
•
Configure security for the display menus
•
Configure response time parameters
•
Configure alarm handling
•
Configure informational parameters
Configure the transmitter display
You can control the process variables shown on the display and a variety of display behaviors.
The transmitter display parameters include:
• Display Language
•
Display Variables
•
Display Precision
• Update Period
•
Auto Scroll
and Auto Scroll Rate
•
Backlight
•
Status LED Blinking
Configure the language used for the display
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT
> OFF-LINE CONFG > DISPLAY > LANG
ProLink
> Configuration > Display > Display Language
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Transmitter Display > General
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Display > Language
Overview
Display Language controls the language used for process data and menus on the display.
Procedure
Select the language you want to use.
Configuration and Use Manual
59
Configure device options and preferences
5.1.2
60
The languages available depend on your transmitter model and version.
Configure the process variables shown on the display
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Display
Device Tools > Configuration > Transmitter Display > Display Variables
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Display > Display Variables
Overview
You can control the process variables shown on the display and the order in which they appear. The display can scroll through up to 15 process variables in any order you choose.
In addition, you can repeat variables or leave slots unassigned.
Restrictions
• You cannot set Display Variable 1 to None. Display Variable 1 must be set to a process variable.
• If you have configured Display Variable 1 to track the primary mA output, you cannot change the setting of Display Variable 1 using this procedure. To change the setting of Display Variable 1, you must change the configuration of mA Output Process Variable for the primary mA output.
Note
If you configure a display variable as a volume process variable and then change Volume Flow Type, the display variable is automatically changed to the equivalent process variable. For example, Volume Flow
Rate would be changed to Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate.
Procedure
For each display variable you want to change, assign the process variable you want to use.
Example: Default display variable configuration
Display variable
Display Variable 1
Display Variable 2
Display Variable 3
Display Variable 4
Display Variable 5
Display Variable 6
Display Variable 7
Display Variable 8
Display Variable 9
Process variable assignment
Mass flow
Mass total
Volume flow
Volume total
Density
Temperature
External pressure
Mass flow
None
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
5.1.3
Configure device options and preferences
Display variable
Display Variable 10
Display Variable 11
Display Variable 12
Display Variable 13
Display Variable 14
Display Variable 15
Process variable assignment
None
None
None
None
None
None
Configure Display Variable 1 to track the primary mA output
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > DISPLY > VAR 1
ProLink > Configuration > Display > Var1
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Transmitter Display > Display Security
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Display > Display Variables
Overview
You can configure Display Variable 1 to track mA Output Process Variable for the primary mA output. When tracking is enabled, you can control Display Variable 1 from the display menu.
Tip
This feature is the only way to configure a display variable from the display menus, and it applies only to Display Variable 1.
Procedure
Configure Display Variable 1 to track the primary mA output.
Display Variable 1
will automatically be set to match mA Output Process Variable for the primary mA output. If you change the configuration of mA Output Process Variable, Display Variable 1 will be updated automatically.
Configure the precision of variables shown on the display
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Display > Display Precision
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Transmitter Display > Display Variables
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Display > Decimal Places
Configuration and Use Manual
61
Configure device options and preferences
5.1.4
Overview
Setting Display Precision determines the precision (number of decimal places) shown on the display. You can set Display Precision independently for each variable.
Setting Display Precision does not affect the actual value of the process variable.
Procedure
1.
Select a process variable.
2.
Set Display Precision to the number of decimal places you want shown when the process variable appears on the display.
For temperature and density process variables, the default value is 2 decimal places.
For all other process variables, the default value is 4 decimal places. The range is
0 to 5.
Tip
The lower the selected precision, the greater the process change must be for it to be reflected on the display. Do not set Display Precision value too low or too high to be useful.
Configure the refresh rate of data shown on the display
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
OFF-LINE MAINT
> OFF-LINE CONFG > DISPLAY > RATE
ProLink > Configuration > Display > Update Period
Device Tools > Configuration > Transmitter Display > Display Variables
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Display > Display Variable Menu Features > Refresh Rate
Overview
You can set Update Period to control how frequently data is refreshed on the display.
Procedure
Set Update Period to the desired value.
The default value is 200 milliseconds. The range is 100 milliseconds to 10,000 milliseconds
(10 seconds).
62
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure device options and preferences
5.1.5
5.1.6
Enable or disable automatic scrolling through the display variables
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > DISPLAY > AUTO SCRLL
ProLink
> Configuration > Display > Display Options > Display Auto Scroll
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Transmitter Display > General
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Display > Display Variable Menu Features > Auto Scroll
Overview
You can configure the display to automatically scroll through the configured display variables or to show a single display variable until the operator activates Scroll. When you set automatic scrolling, you can also configure the length of time each display variable is displayed.
Procedure
1.
Enable or disable Auto Scroll as desired.
Option
Enabled
Disabled
(default)
Description
The display automatically scrolls through each display variable as specified by Scroll Rate. The operator can move to the next display variable at any time using Scroll.
The display shows Display Variable 1 and does not scroll automatically. The operator can move to the next display variable at any time using Scroll.
2.
If you enabled Auto Scroll, set Scroll Rate as desired.
The default value is 10 seconds.
Tip
Scroll Rate may not be available until you apply Auto Scroll.
Enable or disable the display backlight
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > DISPLAY > BKLT
ProLink > Configuration > Display > Display Options > Display Backlight On/Off
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Transmitter Display > General
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Display > Backlight
Overview
You can enable or disable the display backlight.
Configuration and Use Manual
63
Configure device options and preferences
5.1.7
5.2
Procedure
Enable or disable Backlight.
The default setting is Enabled.
Enable or disable Status LED Blinking
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Display > Display Options > Display Status LED Blinking
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Transmitter Display > General
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Display > Display Variable Menu Features > Status LED Blinking
Overview
By default, the status LED blinks (flashes) to indicate unacknowledged alarms. If you disable Status LED Blinking, the status LED does not blink, whether alarms are acknowledged or not. It still changes color to indicate active alarms.
Procedure
Enable or disable Status LED Blinking.
The default setting is Enabled.
Enable or disable operator actions from the display
You can configure the transmitter to let the operator perform specific actions using the display.
You can configure the following:
• Totalizer Start/Stop
• Totalizer Reset
•
Acknowledge All Alarms
64
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure device options and preferences
5.2.1
5.2.2
Enable or disable Totalizer Start/Stop from the display
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > DISPLAY > TOTALS STOP
ProLink
> Configuration > Display > Display Options > Display Start/Stop Totalizers
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Totalizer Control Methods
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Display > Display Variable Menu Features > Start/Stop Totalizers
Overview
You can control whether or not the operator is able to start and stop totalizers and inventories from the display.
Restrictions
•
•
•
You cannot start and stop totalizers individually from the display. All totalizers are started or stopped together.
You cannot start or stop inventories separately from totalizers. When a totalizer is started or stopped, the associated inventory is also started or stopped.
If the petroleum measurement application is installed on your computer, the operator must enter the off-line password to perform this function, even if the off-line password is not enabled.
Procedure
1.
Ensure that at least one totalizer is configured as a display variable.
2.
Enable or disable Totalizer Reset as desired.
Option
Enabled
Description
Operators can start and stop totalizers and inventories from the display, if at least one totalizer is configured as a display variable.
Disabled
(default)
Operators cannot start and stop totalizers and inventories from the display.
Enable or disable Totalizer Reset from the display
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > DISPLAY > TOTALS RESET
ProLink > Configuration > Display > Display Options > Display Totalizer Reset
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Totalizer Control Methods
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Display > Display Variable Menu Features > Totalizer Reset
Overview
You can configure whether or not the operator is able to reset totalizers from the display.
Configuration and Use Manual
65
Configure device options and preferences
5.2.3
66
Restrictions
• This parameter does not apply to inventories. You cannot reset inventories from the display.
•
•
You cannot use the display to reset all totalizers as a group. You must reset totalizers individually.
If the petroleum measurement application is installed on your computer, the operator must enter the off-line password to perform this function, even if the off-line password is not enabled.
Procedure
1.
Ensure that the totalizers you want to reset have been configured as display variables.
If the totalizer is not configured as a display variable, the operator will not be able to reset it.
2.
Enable or disable resetting the totalizer as desired.
Option
Enabled
Description
Operators can reset a totalizer from the display, if the totalizer is configured as a display variable.
Disabled
(default)
Operators cannot reset totalizers from the display.
Enable or disable the Acknowledge All Alarms display command
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
OFF-LINE MAINT
> OFF-LINE CONFG > DISPLAY > ALARM
ProLink > Configuration > Display > Display Options > Display Ack All Alarms
Device Tools > Configuration > Transmitter Display > Ack All
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Display > Offline Variable Menu Features > Acknowledge All
Overview
You can configure whether or not the operator can use a single command to acknowledge all alarms from the display.
Procedure
1.
Ensure that the alarm menu is accessible from the display.
To acknowledge alarms from the display, operators must have access to the alarm menu.
2.
Enable or disable Acknowledge All Alarms as desired.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure device options and preferences
Option
Disabled
Description
Enabled
(default)
Operators can use a single display command to acknowledge all alarms at once.
Operators cannot acknowledge all alarms at once, they must be acknowledged individually.
5.3
Configure security for the display menus
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT
ProLink
> OFF-LINE CONFG > DISPLAY
> Configuration > Display > Display Options
ProLink III
Device Tools
> Configuration > Transmitter Display > Display Security
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Display > Offline Variable Menu Features
Overview
You can control operator access to different sections of the display off-line menu. You can also configure a password to control access.
Procedure
1.
To control operator access to the maintenance section of the off-line menu, enable or disable Off-Line Menu.
Option
Enabled
(default)
Disabled
Description
Operator can access the maintenance section of the off-line menu. This access is required for configuration and calibration, but is not required to view alarms or to access Smart Meter Verification (if applicable).
Operator cannot access the maintenance section of the off-line menu.
2.
To control operator access to the alarm menu, enable or disable Alarm Menu.
Option Description
Enabled
(default)
Operator can access the alarm menu. This access is required to view and acknowledge alarms, but is not required for Smart Meter Verification (if applicable), configuration, or calibration.
Disabled Operator cannot access the alarm menu.
Note
The transmitter status LED changes color to indicate that there are active alarms, but does not show specific alarms.
Configuration and Use Manual
67
Configure device options and preferences
5.4
3.
To require a password for access to the maintenance section of the off-line menu and the Smart Meter Verification menu, enable or disable Off-Line Password.
Option
Enabled
Disabled
(default)
Description
Operator is prompted for the off-line password at entry to the Smart Meter
Verification menu (if applicable) or entry to the maintenance section of the off-line menu.
No password is required for entry to the Smart Meter Verification menu (if applicable) or entry to the maintenance section of the off-line menu.
4.
To require a password to access the alarm menu, enable or disable Alarm Password.
Option
Enabled
Description
Operator is prompted for the off-line password at entry to the alarm menu.
Disabled
(default)
No password is required for entry to the alarm menu.
If both Off-Line Password and Alarm Password are enabled, the operator is prompted for the off-line password to access the off-line menu, but is not prompted thereafter.
5.
(Optional) Set Off-Line Password to the desired value.
The same value is used for both the off-line password and the alarm password. The default value is 1234. The range is 0000 to 9999.
Tip
Record your password for future reference.
Configure response time parameters
You can configure the rate at which process data is polled and process variables are calculated.
Response time parameters include:
•
Update Rate
• Calculation Speed (Response Time)
68
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
5.4.1
Configure device options and preferences
Configure Update Rate
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Device > Update Rate
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Response > Update Rate
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Update Rate
Overview
Update Rate controls the rate at which process data is polled and process variables are calculated. Update Rate = Special produces faster and “noisier” response to changes in the process. Do not use Special mode unless required by your application.
Tip
For systems with a standard core processor, Special mode can improve performance for applications with entrained air or Empty-Full-Empty conditions. This does not apply to systems with an enhanced core processor.
Prerequisites
Before setting Update Rate to Special:
• Check the effects of Special mode on specific process variables.
• Contact Micro Motion.
Procedure
1.
Set Update Rate as desired.
Option Description
Normal
All process data is polled at the rate of 20 times per second (20 Hz).
All process variables are calculated at 20 Hz.
This option is appropriate for most applications.
Special A single, user-specified process variable is polled at the rate of 100 times per second (100 Hz). Other process data is polled at 6.25 Hz). Some process, diagnostic, and calibration data is not polled.
All available process variables are calculated at 100 Hz.
Use this option only if required by your application.
If you change Update Rate, the settings for Flow Damping, Density Damping, and
Temperature Damping are automatically adjusted.
2.
If you set Update Rate to Special, select the process variable to be polled at 100 Hz.
Configuration and Use Manual
69
Configure device options and preferences
Effects of Update Rate = Special
Incompatible features and functions
Special
mode is not compatible with the following features and functions:
• Enhanced events. Use basic events instead.
• All calibration procedures.
• Zero verification.
• Restoring the factory zero or the prior zero.
If required, you can switch to Normal mode, perform the desired procedures, and then return to Special mode.
Process variable updates
Some process variables are not updated when Special mode is enabled.
Table 5-1:
Special
mode and process variable updates
Always polled and updated
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Gas standard volume flow
• Density
• Temperature
• Drive gain
• LPO amplitude
• Status [contains Event 1 and Event
2 (basic events)]
• Raw tube frequency
• Mass total
• Volume total
• Gas standard volume total
Updated only when the petroleum measurement application is disabled
• RPO amplitude
• Board temperature
• Core input voltage
• Mass inventory
• Volume inventory
• Gas standard volume inventory
Never updated
All other process variables and calibration data. They retain the values held at the time you enabled Special mode.
5.4.2
Configure Calculation Speed (Response Time)
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Device > Response Time
ProLink III
Device Tools
> Configuration > Process Measurement > Response > Calculation Speed
Field Communicator Not available
70
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure device options and preferences
Overview
Calculation Speed
is used to apply a different algorithm to the calculation of process variables from the raw process data. Calculation Speed = Special produces faster and “noisier” response to changes in the process.
In ProLink II, Calculation Speed is called Response Time.
Restriction
Calculation Speed is available only on systems with the enhanced core processor.
Tip
You can use Calculation Speed = Special with either setting of Update Rate. The parameters control different aspects of flowmeter processing.
Procedure
Set Calculation Speed as desired.
Option
Normal
Special
Description
Transmitter calculates process variables at the standard speed.
Transmitter calculates process variables at a faster speed.
5.5
5.5.1
Configure alarm handling
The alarm handling parameters control the transmitter’s response to process and device conditions.
Alarm handling parameters include:
•
Fault Timeout
•
Status Alarm Severity
Configure Fault Timeout
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Analog Output > Last Measured Value Timeout
ProLink
> Configuration > Frequency/Discrete Output > Frequency > Last Measured Value Timeout
Device Tools
> Configuration > Fault Processing
Field Communicator Configure > Alert Setup > Alert Severity > Fault Timeout
Configuration and Use Manual
71
Configure device options and preferences
5.5.2
Overview
Fault Timeout
controls the delay before fault actions are performed.
Restriction
Fault Timeout is applied only to the following alarms (listed by Status Alarm Code): A003, A004, A005,
A008, A016, A017, A033. For all other alarms, fault actions are performed as soon as the alarm is detected.
Procedure
Set Fault Timeout as desired.
The default value is 0 seconds. The range is 0 to 60 seconds.
If you set Fault Timeout to 0, fault actions are performed as soon as the alarm condition is detected.
The fault timeout period begins when the transmitter detects an alarm condition. During the fault timeout period, the transmitter continues to report its last valid measurements.
If the fault timeout period expires while the alarm is still active, the fault actions are performed. If the alarm condition clears before the fault timeout expires, no fault actions are performed.
Tip
ProLink II allows you to set Fault Timeout in two locations. However, there is only one parameter, and the same setting is applied to all outputs.
Configure Status Alarm Severity
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Alarm > Severity
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Alert Severity
Field Communicator Configure > Alert Setup > Alert Severity > Set Alert Severity
Overview
Use Status Alarm Severity to control the fault actions that the transmitter performs when it detects an alarm condition.
Restrictions
• For some alarms, Status Alarm Severity is not configurable.
• For some alarms, Status Alarm Severity can be set only to two of the three options.
72
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure device options and preferences
Tip
Micro Motion recommends using the default settings for Status Alarm Severity unless you have a specific requirement to change them.
Procedure
1.
Select a status alarm.
2.
For the selected status alarm, set Status Alarm Severity as desired.
Option Description
Fault Actions when fault is detected:
• The alarm is posted to the Alert List.
• Outputs go to the configured fault action (after Fault Timeout has expired, if applicable).
• Digital communications go to the configured fault action (after Fault Timeout has expired, if applicable).
• The status LED (if available) changes to red or yellow (depending on alarm severity).
Actions when alarm clears:
• Outputs return to normal behavior.
• Digital communications return to normal behavior.
• The status LED (if available) returns to green and may or may not flash.
Informational
Ignore
Actions when fault is detected:
• The alarm is posted to the Alert List.
• The status LED (if available) changes to red or yellow (depending on alarm severity).
Actions when alarm clears:
• The status LED (if available) returns to green and may or may not flash.
No action
Status alarms and options for Status Alarm Severity
A002
A003
A004
A005
A006
A008
Table 5-2: Status alarms and Status Alarm Severity
Alarm code
A001
Status message
EEPROM Error (Core Processor)
Default severity Notes
Fault
RAM Error (Core Processor) Fault
No Sensor Response
Fault
Temperature Overrange Fault
Mass Flow Rate Overrange Fault
Characterization Required
Fault
Density Overrange Fault
Configurable?
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Configuration and Use Manual
73
Configure device options and preferences
Table 5-2: Status alarms and Status Alarm Severity
(continued)
Alarm code
A009
A010
A011
A012
A013
A014
A016
A017
A018
A019
A020
A021
A022
A023
A024
A025
A026
A028
A031
A032
A033
A034
Status message
Transmitter Initializing/
Warming Up
Calibration Failure
Default severity Notes
Fault
Fault
Zero Calibration Failed:
Low
Zero Calibration Failed:
High
Zero Calibration Failed:
Unstable
Low Power
Fault
Fault
Fault
Transmitter Failure
Sensor RTD Failure
Fault
Fault
T-Series RTD Failure
EEPROM Error (Transmitter)
RAM Error (Transmitter)
Fault
Fault
Fault
No Flow Cal Value
Fault
Incorrect Sensor Type (K1) Fault
Configuration Database
Corrupt (Core Processor)
Fault
Fault
Internal Totals Corrupt
(Core Processor)
Program Corrupt (Core
Processor)
Fault
Fault
Boot Sector Fault (Core
Processor)
Sensor/Transmitter Communications Failure
Core Processor Write Failure
Fault
Fault
Fault
Applies only to flowmeters with the standard core processor.
Applies only to flowmeters with the standard core processor.
Applies only to flowmeters with the standard core processor.
Applies only to flowmeters with the standard core processor.
Meter Verification in Progress: Outputs to Fault
Varies
Applies only to flowmeters with the enhanced core processor.
Applies only to transmitters with
Smart Meter Verification.
If outputs are set to Last Measured
Value , severity is Info. If outputs are set to Fault, severity is Fault.
Fault Insufficient Right/Left Pickoff Signal
Meter Verification Failed
Informational
Applies only to flowmeters with the enhanced core processor.
Applies only to transmitters with
Smart Meter Verification.
Configurable?
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
74
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Configure device options and preferences
Table 5-2: Status alarms and Status Alarm Severity
(continued)
Alarm code
A035
A100
A101
A102
A103
A104
A105
A106
A107
A108
A109
A110
A111
A112
A113
A114
A115
A118
A119
A131
Status message Default severity Notes
Meter Verification Aborted Informational Applies only to transmitters with
Smart Meter Verification.
mA Output 1 Saturated Informational Can be set to either Informational or
Ignore
, but cannot be set to Fault.
mA Output 1 Fixed
Informational
Can be set to either Informational or
Ignore , but cannot be set to Fault.
Informational
Drive Overrange
Data Loss Possible (Totals and Inventories)
Informational Applies only to flowmeters with the standard core processor.
Can be set to either Informational or
Ignore
, but cannot be set to Fault.
Calibration in Progress
Informational
Can be set to either Informational or
Ignore , but cannot be set to Fault.
Slug Flow
Burst Mode Enabled
Informational
Informational Can be set to either Informational or
Ignore
, but cannot be set to Fault.
Power Reset Occurred
Informational
Basic Event 1 On
Basic Event 2 On
Frequency Output Saturated
Frequency Output Fixed
Informational
Informational
Informational
Informational
Normal transmitter behavior; occurs after every power cycle.
Applies only to basic events.
Applies only to basic events.
Can be set to either Informational or
Ignore , but cannot be set to Fault.
Can be set to either Informational or
Ignore
, but cannot be set to Fault.
Informational
Upgrade Transmitter Software mA Output 2 Saturated mA Output 2 Fixed
Informational
Informational
Applies only to systems with transmitter software earlier than v5.0.
Can be set to either Informational or
Ignore , but cannot be set to Fault.
Can be set to either Informational or
Ignore
, but cannot be set to Fault.
Informational
No External Input or Polled
Data
Discrete Output 1 Fixed Informational
Discrete Output 2 Fixed Informational
Can be set to either Informational or
Ignore , but cannot be set to Fault.
Can be set to either Informational or
Ignore
, but cannot be set to Fault.
Meter Verification in Progress: Outputs to Last
Measured Value
Informational
Applies only to transmitters with
Smart Meter Verification.
Configurable?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Configuration and Use Manual
75
Configure device options and preferences
Table 5-2: Status alarms and Status Alarm Severity
(continued)
Alarm code
A132
A141
Status message
Sensor Simulation Active
DDC trigger(s) have completed
Default severity Notes
Informational
Applies only to flowmeters with the enhanced core processor.
Can be set to either Informational or
Ignore , but cannot be set to Fault.
Informational Applies only to flowmeters with the enhanced core processor.
Can be set to either Informational or
Ignore
, but cannot be set to Fault.
Configurable?
Yes
Yes
5.6
5.6.1
Configure informational parameters
The informational parameters can be used to identify or describe your flowmeter but they are not used in transmitter processing and are not required.
The informational parameters include:
• Device parameters
-
Descriptor
-
Message
-
Date
• Sensor parameters
-
Sensor Serial Number
-
Sensor Material
-
Sensor Liner Material
Sensor Flange Type
Configure Descriptor
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Device > Descriptor
Device Tools
> Configuration > Informational Parameters > Transmitter
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Info Parameters > Transmitter Info > Descriptor
Overview
Descriptor lets you store a description in transmitter memory. The description is not used in processing and is not required.
76
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
5.6.2
5.6.3
Configure device options and preferences
Procedure
Enter a description for the transmitter.
You can use up to 16 characters for the description.
Configure Message
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Device > Message
Device Tools > Configuration > Informational Parameters > Transmitter
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Info Parameters > Transmitter Info > Message
Overview
Message
lets you store a short message in transmitter memory. This parameter is not used in processing and is not required.
Procedure
Enter a short message for the transmitter.
Your message can be up to 32 characters long.
Configure Date
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Device > Date
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Informational Parameters > Transmitter
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Info Parameters > Transmitter Info > Date
Overview
Date lets you store a static date (not updated by the transmitter) in transmitter memory.
This parameter is not used in processing and is not required.
Procedure
Enter the date you want to use, in the form mm/dd/yyyy.
Tip
ProLink II and ProLink III provide a calendar tool to help you select the date.
Configuration and Use Manual
77
Configure device options and preferences
5.6.4
5.6.5
Configure Sensor Serial Number
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Sensor > Sensor S/N
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Informational Parameters > Sensor
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Info Parameters > Sensor Information > Sensor Serial Number
Overview
Sensor Serial Number lets you store the serial number of the sensor component of your flowmeter in transmitter memory. This parameter is not used in processing and is not required.
Procedure
1.
Obtain the sensor serial number from your sensor tag.
2.
Enter the serial number in the Sensor Serial Number field.
Configure Sensor Material
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Sensor > Sensor Matl
Device Tools > Configuration > Informational Parameters > Sensor
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Info Parameters > Sensor Information > Tube Wetted Material
Overview
Sensor Material lets you store the type of material used for your sensor’s wetted parts in transmitter memory. This parameter is not used in processing and is not required.
Procedure
1.
Obtain the material used for your sensor’s wetted parts from the documents shipped with your sensor, or from a code in the sensor model number.
To interpret the model number, refer to the product data sheet for your sensor.
2.
Set Sensor Material to the appropriate option.
78
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
5.6.6
5.6.7
Configure device options and preferences
Configure Sensor Liner Material
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Sensor > Liner Matl
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Informational Parameters > Sensor
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Info Parameters > Sensor Information > Tube Lining
Overview
Sensor Liner Material lets you store the type of material used for your sensor liner in transmitter memory. This parameter is not used in processing and is not required.
Procedure
1.
Obtain your sensor’s liner material from the documents shipped with your sensor, or from a code in the sensor model number.
To interpret the model number, refer to the product data sheet for your sensor.
2.
Set Sensor Liner Material to the appropriate option.
Configure Sensor Flange Type
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Sensor > Flange
Device Tools
> Configuration > Informational Parameters > Sensor
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Info Parameters > Sensor Information > Sensor Flange
Overview
Sensor Flange Type
lets you store your sensor’s flange type in transmitter memory. This parameter is not used in processing and is not required.
Procedure
1.
Obtain your sensor’s flange type from the documents shipped with your sensor, or from a code in the sensor model number.
To interpret the model number, refer to the product data sheet for your sensor.
2.
Set Sensor Flange Type to the appropriate option.
Configuration and Use Manual
79
Configure device options and preferences
80
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
6
6.1
Integrate the meter with the control system
Integrate the meter with the control system
Topics covered in this chapter:
•
Configure the transmitter channels
•
Configure the mA output
•
Configure the frequency output
•
Configure the discrete output
•
Configure events
•
Configure digital communications
Configure the transmitter channels
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > IO > CH B
ProLink > Configuration > Frequency/Discrete Output
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > I/O > Channels
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Channels > Channel B
Overview
You can configure Channel B on your transmitter to operate as a frequency output or a discrete output. The channel configuration must match the wiring at the transmitter terminals.
Prerequisites
To avoid causing process errors:
• Configure the channels before configuring the outputs.
• Before changing the channel configuration, ensure that all control loops affected by the channel are under manual control.
Procedure
Set Channel B as desired.
Option
Frequency output
Discrete output
Description
Channel B will operate as a frequency output.
Channel B will operate as a discrete output.
Configuration and Use Manual
81
Integrate the meter with the control system
6.2
6.2.1
Postrequisites
For each channel that you configured, perform or verify the corresponding input or output configuration. When the configuration of a channel is changed, the channel’s behavior will be controlled by the configuration that is stored for the selected input or output type, and the stored configuration may not be appropriate for your process.
After verifying channel and output configuration, return the control loop to automatic control.
Configure the mA output
The mA output is used to report the configured process variable. The mA output parameters control how the process variable is reported. Your transmitter has one mA output: Channel A.
The mA output parameters include:
• mA Output Process Variable
• Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV)
• AO Cutoff
• Added Damping
• AO Fault Action and AO Fault Value
Important
Whenever you change an mA output parameter, verify all other mA output parameters before returning the flowmeter to service. In some situations, the transmitter automatically loads a set of stored values, and these values may not be appropriate for your application.
Configure mA Output Process Variable
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > IO > CH A > AO
ProLink
> Configuration > Analog Output
Device Tools
> Configuration > I/O > Outputs > mA Output
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > mA Output
Overview
Use mA Output Process Variable to select the variable that is reported over the mA output.
Prerequisites
• If you plan to configure the output to report volume flow, ensure that you have set
Volume Flow Type as desired: Liquid or Gas Standard Volume.
82
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Integrate the meter with the control system
• If you are using the HART variables, be aware that changing the configuration of mA
Output Process Variable
will change the configuration of the HART Primary Variable
(PV) and the HART Tertiary Variable (TV).
• If you have configured Display Variable 1 to track mA Output Process Variable, be aware that changing the configuration of mA Output Process Variable will change the contents of Display Variable 1.
Procedure
Set mA Output Process Variable as desired.
The default setting is Mass Flow Rate.
Options for mA Output Process Variable
The transmitter provides a basic set of options for mA Output Process Variable, plus several application-specific options. Different communications tools may use different labels for the options.
Table 6-1: Options for mA Output Process Variable
Process variable
Mass flow rate
Volume flow rate
Display
MFLOW
VFLOW
Gas standard volume flow rate
GSV F
Net volume flow rate NET V
ProLink II
Mass Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate
Gas Std Vol Flow Rate
CM: Net Vol Flow Rate
Label
ProLink III
Mass Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate
Gas Standard Volume
Flow Rate
Net Volume Flow Rate
Field Communicator
Mass flo
Vol flo
Gas vol flo
ED Net Vol flo
6.2.2
Configure Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range
Value (URV)
Display
ProLink II
• OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > IO > CH A > 4 mA
• OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > IO > CH A > 20 mA
• ProLink > Configuration > Analog Output > Primary Output > Lower Range Value
• ProLink > Configuration > Analog Output > Primary Output > Upper Range Value
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > I/O > Outputs > mA Output
Field Communicator •
Configure
> Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > mA Output > mA Output Settings > PV LRV
•
Configure
> Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > mA Output > mA Output Settings > PV URV
Configuration and Use Manual
83
Integrate the meter with the control system
Overview
The Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV) are used to scale the mA output, that is, to define the relationship between mA Output Process Variable and the mA output level.
Note
For transmitter software v5.0 and later, if you change LRV and URV from the factory default values, and you later change mA Output Process Variable, LRV and URV will not reset to the default values. For example, if you set mA Output Process Variable to Mass Flow Rate and change the LRV and URV, then you set mA Output Process Variable to Density, and finally you change mA Output Process Variable back to Mass
Flow Rate , LRV and URV for Mass Flow Rate reset to the values that you configured. In earlier versions of the transmitter software, LRV and URV reset to the factory default values.
Procedure
Set LRV and URV as desired.
• LRV is the value of mA Output Process Variable represented by an output of 4 mA. The default value for LRV depends on the setting of mA Output Process Variable. Enter LRV in the measurement units that are configured for mA Output Process Variable.
• URV is the value of mA Output Process Variable represented by an output of 20 mA. The default value for URV depends on the setting of mA Output Process Variable. Enter URV in the measurement units that are configured for mA Output Process Variable.
Tips
For best performance:
• Set LRV
≥ LSL (lower sensor limit).
• Set URV ≤ USL (upper sensor limit).
• Set these values so that the difference between URV and LRV is ≥ Min Span (minimum span).
Defining URV and LRV within the recommended values for Min Span, LSL, and USL ensures that the resolution of the mA output signal is within range of the bit precision of the D/A converter.
Note
You can set URV below LRV. For example, you can set URV to
50
and LRV to
100
.
The mA output uses a range of 4–20 mA to represent mA Output Process Variable. Between
LRV and URV, the mA output is linear with the process variable. If the process variable drops below LRV or rises above URV, the transmitter posts an output saturation alarm.
Default values for Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range
Value (URV)
Each option for mA Output Process Variable has its own LRV and URV. If you change the configuration of mA Output Process Variable, the corresponding LRV and URV are loaded and used.
84
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
6.2.3
Integrate the meter with the control system
Table 6-2: Default values for Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV)
Process variable
All mass flow variables
LRV
–200.000 g/sec
All liquid volume flow variables –0.200 l/sec
Gas standard volume flow –423.78 SCFM
URV
200.000 g/sec
0.200 l/sec
423.78 SCFM
Configure AO Cutoff
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Analog Output > Primary Output > AO Cutoff
Device Tools > Configuration > I/O > Outputs > mA Output
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > mA Output > mA Output Settings > PV MAO Cutoff
Overview
AO Cutoff
(Analog Output Cutoff) specifies the lowest mass flow rate, volume flow rate, or gas standard volume flow rate that will be reported through the mA output. Any flow rates below AO Cutoff will be reported as 0.
Restriction
AO Cutoff is applied only if mA Output Process Variable is set to Mass Flow Rate, Volume Flow Rate, or Gas
Standard Volume Flow Rate
. If mA Output Process Variable is set to a different process variable, AO Cutoff is not configurable, and the transmitter does not implement the AO cutoff function.
Procedure
Set AO Cutoff as desired.
The default value for AO Cutoff is 0.0 g/sec.
Tip
For most applications, the default value of AO Cutoff should be used. Contact Micro Motion customer service before changing AO Cutoff.
Interaction between AO Cutoff and process variable cutoffs
When mA Output Process Variable is set to a flow variable (for example, mass flow rate or volume flow rate), AO Cutoff interacts with Mass Flow Cutoff or Volume Flow Cutoff. The transmitter puts the cutoff into effect at the highest flow rate at which a cutoff is applicable.
Configuration and Use Manual
85
Integrate the meter with the control system
6.2.4
Example: Cutoff interaction
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable
= Mass Flow Rate
•
Frequency Output Process Variable
= Mass Flow Rate
• AO Cutoff = 10 g/sec
• Mass Flow Cutoff = 15 g/sec
Result: If the mass flow rate drops below 15 g/sec, all outputs representing mass flow will report zero flow.
Example: Cutoff interaction
Configuration:
• mA Output Process Variable = Mass Flow Rate
•
Frequency Output Process Variable
= Mass Flow Rate
•
AO Cutoff
= 15 g/sec
•
Mass Flow Cutoff
= 10 g/sec
Result:
• If the mass flow rate drops below 15 g/sec but not below 10 g/sec:
The mA output will report zero flow.
The frequency output will report the actual flow rate.
• If the mass flow rate drops below 10 g/sec, both outputs will report zero flow.
Configure Added Damping
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Analog Output > Primary Output > AO Added Damp
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > I/O > Outputs > mA Output
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > mA Output > mA Output Settings > PV Added Damping
Overview
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. Damping
Value specifies the time period (in seconds) over which the transmitter will spread changes in the reported process variable. At the end of the interval, the reported process variable will reflect 63% of the change in the actual measured value. Added Damping controls the amount of damping that will be applied to the mA output. It affects the reporting of mA
Output Process Variable
through the mA output only. It does not affect the reporting of that process variable via any other method (e.g., the frequency output or digital communications), or the value of the process variable used in calculations.
86
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Integrate the meter with the control system
Note
Added Damping
is not applied if the mA output is fixed (for example, during loop testing) or if the mA output is reporting a fault. Added Damping is applied while sensor simulation is active.
Procedure
Set Added Damping to the desired value.
The default value is 0.0 seconds.
When you specify a value for Added Damping, the transmitter automatically rounds the value down to the nearest valid value.
Note
Added Damping values are affected by the setting of Update Rate and 100 Hz Variable.
Table 6-3: Valid values for Added Damping
Setting of Update Rate
Normal
Special
Process variable
N/A
100 Hz variable (if assigned to the mA output)
100 Hz variable (if not assigned to the mA output)
All other process variables
Update rate in effect
20 Hz
100 Hz
6.25 Hz
Valid values for Added Damping
0.0
, 0.1, 0.3, 0.75, 1.6, 3.3, 6.5, 13.5, 27.5, 55,
110 , 220, 440
0.0
, 0.04, 0.12, 0.30, 0.64, 1.32, 2.6, 5.4, 11, 22,
44
, 88, 176, 350
0.0
, 0.32, 0.96, 2.40, 5.12, 10.56, 20.8, 43.2, 88,
176 , 352
Interaction between Added Damping and process variable damping
When mA Output Process Variable is set to a flow variable, density, or temperature, Added
Damping interacts with Flow Damping, Density Damping, or Temperature Damping. If multiple damping parameters are applicable, the effect of damping the process variable is calculated first, and the added damping calculation is applied to the result of that calculation.
Example: Damping interaction
Configuration:
•
Flow Damping
= 1 second
• mA Output Process Variable
= Mass Flow Rate
• Added Damping = 2 seconds
Configuration and Use Manual
87
Integrate the meter with the control system
6.2.5
88
Result: A change in the mass flow rate will be reflected in the mA output over a time period that is greater than 3 seconds. The exact time period is calculated by the transmitter according to internal algorithms which are not configurable.
Configure mA Output Fault Action and mA Output Fault
Level
Display
ProLink II
Not available
• ProLink > Configuration > Analog Output > Primary Output > AO Fault Action
• ProLink > Configuration > Analog Output > Primary Output > AO Fault Level
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Fault Processing
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > mA Output > MA0 Fault Settings
Overview
mA Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the mA output if the transmitter encounters an internal fault condition.
Note
For some faults only: If Last Measured Value Timeout is set to a non-zero value, the transmitter will not implement the fault action until the timeout has elapsed.
Procedure
1.
Set mA Output Fault Action to the desired value.
The default setting is Downscale.
2.
If you set mA Output Fault Action to Upscale or Downscale, set mA Output Fault Level as desired.
Options for mA Output Fault Action and mA Output Fault
Level
Table 6-4: Options for mA Output Fault Action and mA Output Fault Level
Option
Upscale
Downscale (default)
Internal Zero
mA output behavior
Goes to the configured fault level
Goes to the configured fault level
Goes to the mA output level associated with a process variable value of 0 (zero), as determined by Lower Range Value and
Upper Range Value settings mA Output Fault Level
Default: 22.0 mA
Range: 21 to 24 mA
Default: 2.0 mA
Range: 1.0 to 3.6 mA
Not applicable
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
6.3
Integrate the meter with the control system
Table 6-4: Options for mA Output Fault Action and mA Output Fault Level
(continued)
Option
None
mA output behavior
Tracks data for the assigned process variable; no fault action mA Output Fault Level
Not applicable
CAUTION!
If you set mA Output Fault Action or Frequency Output Fault Action to None, be sure to set Digital
Communications Fault Action
to None. If you do not, the output will not report actual process data,
and this may result in measurement errors or unintended consequences for your process.
Restriction
If you set Digital Communications Fault Action to NAN, you cannot set mA Output Fault Action or Frequency
Output Fault Action to None. If you try to do this, the transmitter will not accept the configuration.
Configure the frequency output
The frequency output is used to report a process variable. The frequency output parameters control how the process variable is reported. Your transmitter may have zero or one frequency output: Channel B can be configured as a frequency output or a discrete output.
The frequency output parameters include:
•
Frequency Output Polarity
•
Frequency Output Scaling Method
• Frequency Output Maximum Pulse Width
•
Frequency Output Fault Action
and Frequency Output Fault Value
Restriction
The process variable assigned to the primary mA output is automatically assigned to the frequency output. You cannot assign a different process variable.
Important
Whenever you change a frequency output parameter, verify all other frequency output parameters before returning the flowmeter to service. In some situations, the transmitter automatically loads a set of stored values, and these values may not be appropriate for your application.
Configuration and Use Manual
89
Integrate the meter with the control system
6.3.1
6.3.2
Configure Frequency Output Polarity
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > IO > CH B > SET FO > FO POLAR
ProLink
> Configuration > Frequency/Discrete Output > Frequency > Freq Output Polarity
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > I/O > Outputs > Frequency Output
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Frequency Output > FO Settings > FO Polarity
Overview
Frequency Output Polarity controls how the output indicates the ON (active) state. The default value, Active High, is appropriate for most applications. Active Low may be required by applications that use low-frequency signals.
Procedure
Set Frequency Output Polarity as desired.
The default setting is Active High.
Options for Frequency Output Polarity
Table 6-5: Options for Frequency Output Polarity
Polarity
Active High
Active Low
Reference voltage (OFF)
0
As determined by power supply, pull-up resistor, and load
(see the installation manual for your transmitter)
Pulse voltage (ON)
As determined by power supply, pull-up resistor, and load
(see the installation manual for your transmitter)
0
Configure Frequency Output Scaling Method
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > IO > CH B > SET FO > FO SCALE
ProLink > Configuration > Frequency/Discrete Output > Frequency > Scaling Method
ProLink III
Device Tools
> Configuration > I/O > Outputs > Frequency Output
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Frequency Output > FO Scaling
90
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Integrate the meter with the control system
Overview
Frequency Output Scaling Method
defines the relationship between output pulse and flow units. Set Frequency Output Scaling Method as required by your frequency receiving device.
Procedure
1.
Set Frequency Output Scaling Method.
Option Description
Frequency=Flow
(default)
Frequency calculated from flow rate
Pulses/Unit
Units/Pulse
A user-specified number of pulses represents one flow unit
A pulse represents a user-specified number of flow units
2.
Set additional required parameters.
• If you set Frequency Output Scaling Method to Frequency=Flow, set Rate Factor and
Frequency Factor .
• If you set Frequency Output Scaling Method to Pulses/Unit, define the number of pulses that will represent one flow unit.
• If you set Frequency Output Scaling Method to Units/Pulse, define the number of units that each pulse will indicate.
Calculate frequency from flow rate
The Frequency=Flow option is used to customize the frequency output for your application when you do not know appropriate values for Units/Pulse or Pulses/Unit.
If you specify Frequency=Flow, you must provide values for Rate Factor and Frequency Factor:
Rate Factor The maximum flow rate that you want the frequency output to report.
Above this rate, the transmitter will report A110: Frequency Output Saturated.
Frequency
Factor
A value calculated as follows:
FrequencyFactor =
RateFactor
T x N where:
T
Factor to convert selected time base to seconds
N
Number of pulses per flow unit, as configured in the receiving device
The resulting Frequency Factor must be within the range of the frequency output (0 to
10,000 Hz):
• If Frequency Factor is less than1 Hz,reconfigure the receiving device for a higher pulses/unit setting.
• If Frequency Factor is greater than 10,000 Hz, reconfigure the receiving device for a lower pulses/unit setting.
Configuration and Use Manual
91
Integrate the meter with the control system
6.3.3
Tip
If Frequency Output Scale Method is set to Frequency=Flow, and Frequency Output Maximum Pulse Width is set to a non-zero value, Micro Motion recommends setting Frequency Factor to a value below 200 Hz.
Example: Configure Frequency=Flow
You want the frequency output to report all flow rates up to 2000 kg/min.
The frequency receiving device is configured for 10 pulses/kg.
Solution:
FrequencyFactor =
FrequencyFactor =
RateFactor
T
2000
60 x N x 10
FrequencyFactor = 333.33
Set parameters as follows:
• Rate Factor : 2000
• Frequency Factor : 333.33
Configure Frequency Output Maximum Pulse Width
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Frequency/Discrete Output > Frequency > Freq Pulse Width
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > I/O > Outputs > Frequency Output
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Frequency Output > FO Settings > Max Pulse Width
Overview
Frequency Output Maximum Pulse Width is used to ensure that the duration of the ON signal is great enough for your frequency receiving device to detect.
The ON signal may be the high voltage or 0.0 V, depending on Frequency Output Polarity.
Table 6-6: Interaction of Frequency Output Maximum Pulse Width and Frequency
Output Polarity
Polarity
Active High
Pulse width
92
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Integrate the meter with the control system
Table 6-6: Interaction of Frequency Output Maximum Pulse Width and Frequency
Output Polarity
(continued)
Polarity
Active Low
Pulse width
6.3.4
Procedure
Set Frequency Output Maximum Pulse Width as desired.
The default value is 277 milliseconds. You can set Frequency Output Maximum Pulse Width to
0 milliseconds or to a value between 0.5 milliseconds and 277.5 milliseconds. The transmitter automatically adjusts the value to the nearest valid value.
Tip
Micro Motion recommends leaving Frequency Output Maximum Pulse Width at the default value. Contact
Micro Motion customer service before changing Frequency Output Maximum Pulse Width.
Configure Frequency Output Fault Action and Frequency
Output Fault Level
Display
ProLink II
Not available
• ProLink > Configuration > Frequency/Discrete Output > Frequency > Freq Fault Action
• ProLink > Configuration > Frequency/Discrete Output > Frequency > Freq Fault Level
Device Tools > Configuration > Fault Processing ProLink III
Field Communicator • Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Frequency Output > FO Fault Parameters > FO
Fault Action
• Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Frequency Output > FO Fault Parameters > FO
Fault Level
Overview
Frequency Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the frequency output if the transmitter encounters an internal fault condition.
Note
For some faults only: If Last Measured Value Timeout is set to a non-zero value, the transmitter will not implement the fault action until the timeout has elapsed.
Procedure
1.
Set Frequency Output Fault Action as desired.
Configuration and Use Manual
93
Integrate the meter with the control system
6.4
The default value is Downscale (0 Hz).
2.
If you set Frequency Output Fault Action to Upscale, set Frequency Fault Level to the desired value.
The default value is 15000 Hz. The range is 10 to 15000 Hz.
Options for Frequency Output Fault Action
Table 6-7: Options for Frequency Output Fault Action
Label
Upscale
Downscale
Internal Zero
None (default)
Frequency output behavior
Goes to configured Upscale value:
• Range: 10 Hz to 15000 Hz
• Default: 15000 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
Tracks data for the assigned process variable; no fault action
CAUTION!
If you set mA Output Fault Action or Frequency Output Fault Action to None, be sure to set Digital
Communications Fault Action
to None. If you do not, the output will not report actual process data,
and this may result in measurement errors or unintended consequences for your process.
Restriction
If you set Digital Communications Fault Action to NAN, you cannot set mA Output Fault Action or Frequency
Output Fault Action to None. If you try to do this, the transmitter will not accept the configuration.
Configure the discrete output
The discrete output is used to report specific flowmeter or process conditions. The discrete output parameters control which condition is reported and how it is reported. Your transmitter may have zero or one discrete output: Channel B can be configured as a frequency output or a discrete output.
The discrete output parameters include:
•
Discrete Output Source
• Discrete Output Polarity
•
Discrete Output Fault Action
Restriction
Before you can configure the discrete output, you must configure a channel to operate as a discrete output.
94
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Integrate the meter with the control system
6.4.1
Important
Whenever you change a discrete output parameter, verify all other discrete output parameters before returning the flowmeter to service. In some situations, the transmitter automatically loads a set of stored values, and these values may not be appropriate for your application.
Configure Discrete Output Source
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > IO > CH B > SET DO > DO SRC
ProLink
> Configuration > Frequency/Discrete Output > Discrete Output > DO Assignment
Device Tools
> Configuration > I/O > Outputs > Discrete Output
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Discrete Output > DO Assignment
Overview
Discrete Output Source controls which flowmeter condition or process condition is reported via the discrete output.
Procedure
Set Discrete Output Source to the desired option.
The default setting for Discrete Output Source is Flow Direction.
Options for Discrete Output Source
Table 6-8: Options for Discrete Output Source
Label
Option
Discrete Event 1–
5
(1)
Display
D EV x
ProLink II
Discrete
Event x
Event 1–2
(2)
EVNT1
EVNT2
Event 1
Event 2
ProLink III
Enhanced Event
1
Enhanced Event
2
Enhanced Event
3
Enhanced Event
4
Enhanced Event
5
Event 1
Event 2
Field Communicator
Discrete
Event x
Condition
ON
OFF
Event 1
Event 2
ON
Discrete output voltage
Site-specific
0 V
Site-specific
(1) Events configured using the enhanced event model.
(2) Events configured using the basic event model.
Configuration and Use Manual
95
Integrate the meter with the control system
Table 6-8: Options for Discrete Output Source
(continued)
Label
Option
Flow Switch
Display
E1OR2
FL SW
ProLink II
Event 1 or
Event 2
Flow Switch Indication
ProLink III
Event 1 or Event
2 Status
Flow Switch Indicator
Flow Direction
Calibration in Progress
ZERO
Fault
FLDIR
FAULT
Field Communicator
Event 1 or
Event 2
Flow Switch
Forward/Reverse Indication
Calibration in
Progress
Forward Reverse
Indicator
Calibration in Progress
Fault Condition
Indication
Fault Indication
Forward/Reverse
Calibration in
Progress
Fault
Condition
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Forward flow
Reverse flow
Discrete output voltage
0 V
Site-specific
0 V
0 V
Site-specific
Site-specific
0 V
Site-specific
0 V
Important
This table assumes that Discrete Output Polarity is set to Active High. If Discrete Output Polarity is set to Active
Low , reverse the voltage values.
Important
If you assign flow switch to the discrete output, you must also configure Flow Switch Variable, Flow
Switch Setpoint , and Hysteresis.
Configure Flow Switch parameters
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > IO > CH B > SET DO > CONFIG FL SW
• ProLink > Configuration > Flow > Flow Switch Variable
• ProLink > Configuration > Flow > Flow Switch Setpoint
• ProLink > Configuration > Flow > Flow Switch Hysteresis
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > I/O > Outputs > Discrete Output
Field Communicator •
Configure
> Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Discrete Output > Flow Switch Source
• Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Discrete Output > Flow Switch Setpoint
• Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Discrete Output > Hysteresis
Overview
Flow Switch is used to indicate that the flow rate (measured by the configured flow variable) has moved past the configured setpoint, in either direction. The flow switch is implemented with a user-configurable hysteresis.
96
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
6.4.2
Integrate the meter with the control system
Procedure
1.
Set Discrete Output Source to Flow Switch, if you have not already done so.
2.
Set Flow Switch Variable to the flow variable that you want to use to control the flow switch.
3.
Set Flow Switch Setpoint to the value at which the flow switch will be triggered (after
Hysteresis
is applied).
• If the flow rate is below this value, the discrete output is ON.
• If the flow rate is above this value, the discrete output is OFF.
4.
Set Hysteresis to the percentage of variation above and below the setpoint that will operate as a deadband.
Hysteresis defines a range around the setpoint within which the flow switch will not change. The default is 5%. The valid range is 0.1% to 10%.
Example: If Flow Switch Setpoint = 100 g/sec and Hysteresis = 5%, and the first measured flow rate is above 100 g/sec, the discrete output is OFF. It will remain OFF unless the flow rate drops below 95 g/sec. If this happens, the discrete output will turn ON, and remain ON until the flow rate rises above 105 g/sec. At this point it turns OFF and will remain OFF until the flow rate drops below 95 g/sec.
Configure Discrete Output Polarity
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > IO > CH B > DO > POLAR
ProLink
> Configuration > Frequency/Discrete Output > Discrete Output > DO Polarity
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > I/O > Outputs > Discrete Output
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Discrete Output > DO Polarity
Overview
Discrete outputs have two states: ON (active) and OFF (inactive). Two different voltage levels are used to represent these states. Discrete Output Polarity controls which voltage level represents which state.
Procedure
Set Discrete Output Polarity as desired.
The default setting is Active High.
Configuration and Use Manual
97
Integrate the meter with the control system
Options for Discrete Output Polarity
Table 6-9: Options for Discrete Output Polarity
Polarity
Active High
Active Low
Description
• When asserted (condition tied to DO is true), the circuit provides a pull-up to 24 V.
• When not asserted (condition tied to DO is false), the circuit provides 0 V.
• When asserted (condition tied to DO is true), the circuit provides 0 V.
• When not asserted (condition tied to DO is false), the circuit provides a pull-up to 24 V.
Figure 6-1: Typical discrete output circuit
6.4.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
24 V (Nom)
3.2 K
Ω
Out+
Out
−
Configure Discrete Output Fault Action
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Frequency/Discrete Output > Discrete Output > DO Fault Action
Device Tools > Configuration > Fault Processing
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Discrete Output > DO Fault Action
98
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Integrate the meter with the control system
Overview
Discrete Output Fault Action
controls the behavior of the discrete output if the transmitter encounters an internal fault condition.
Note
For some faults only: If Last Measured Value Timeout is set to a non-zero value, the transmitter will not implement the fault action until the timeout has elapsed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Discrete Output Fault Action as a fault indicator. If you do, you may not be able to
distinguish a fault condition from a normal operating condition. If you want to use the discrete
output as a fault indicator, see
Fault indication with the discrete output
.
Procedure
Set Discrete Output Fault Action as desired.
The default setting is None.
Options for Discrete Output Fault Action
Table 6-10: Options for Discrete Output Fault Action
Label
Discrete output behavior
Upscale
Downscale
None (default)
Polarity=Active High
• Fault: discrete output is ON
(site-specific voltage)
• No fault: discrete output is controlled by its assignment
• Fault: discrete output is OFF
(0 V)
• No fault: discrete output is controlled by its assignment
Polarity=Active Low
•
•
•
•
Fault: discrete output is OFF
(0 V)
No fault: discrete output is controlled by its assignment
Fault: discrete output is ON
(site-specific voltage)
No fault: discrete output is controlled by its assignment
Discrete output is controlled by its assignment
Fault indication with the discrete output
To indicate faults via the discrete output, set parameters as follows:
•
Discrete Output Source
= Fault
•
Discrete Output Fault Action
= None
Configuration and Use Manual
99
Integrate the meter with the control system
6.5
6.5.1
100
Note
If Discrete Output Source is set to Fault and a fault occurs, the discrete output is always ON. The setting of Discrete Output Fault Action is ignored.
Configure events
An event occurs when the real-time value of a user-specified process variable moves past a user-defined setpoint. Events are used to provide notification of process changes or to perform specific transmitter actions if a process change occurs.
Your transmitter supports two event models:
• Basic event model
• Enhanced event model
Configure a basic event
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink
> Configuration > Events
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Events > Basic Events
Field Communicator Not available
Overview
A basic event is used to provide notification of process changes. A basic event occurs (is
ON) if the real-time value of a user-specified process variable moves above (HI) or below
(LO) a user-defined setpoint. You can define up to two basic events. Event status can be queried via digital communications, and a discrete output can be configured to report event status.
Procedure
1.
Select the event that you want to configure.
2.
Specify Event Type.
Options
HI
LO
Description
x > A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable (x) is greater than the setpoint (Setpoint A), endpoint not included.
x < A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable (x) is less than the setpoint (Setpoint A), endpoint not included.
3.
Assign a process variable to the event.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Integrate the meter with the control system
6.5.2
4.
Set a value for Setpoint A.
5.
(Optional) Configure a discrete output to switch states in response to the event status.
Configure an enhanced event
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Discrete Events
Device Tools > Configuration > Events > Enhanced Events
Field Communicator Configure > Alert Setup > Discrete Events
Overview
An enhanced event is used to provide notification of process changes and, optionally, to perform specific transmitter actions if the event occurs. An enhanced event occurs (is ON) if the real-time value of a user-specified process variable moves above (HI) or below (LO) a user-defined setpoint, or in range (IN) or out of range (OUT) with respect to two userdefined setpoints. You can define up to five enhanced events. For each enhanced event, you can assign one or more actions that the transmitter will perform if the enhanced event occurs.
Procedure
1.
Select the event that you want to configure.
2.
Specify Event Type.
Options
HI
LO
IN
OUT
Description
x > A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable (x) is greater than the setpoint (Setpoint A), endpoint not included.
x < A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable (x) is less than the setpoint (Setpoint A), endpoint not included.
A
≤ x ≤ B
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable (x) is
“in range,” that is, between Setpoint A and Setpoint B, endpoints included.
x ≤ A or x ≥ B
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable (x) is
“out of range,” that is, less than Setpoint A or greater than Setpoint B, endpoints included.
3.
Assign a process variable to the event.
4.
Set values for the required setpoints.
• For HI and LO events, set Setpoint A.
Configuration and Use Manual
101
Integrate the meter with the control system
• For IN and OUT events, set Setpoint A and Setpoint B.
5.
(Optional) Configure a discrete output to switch states in response to the event status.
6.
(Optional) Specify the action or actions that the transmitter will perform when the event occurs.
• With the display: OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > IO > CH C > SET DI > DI ACT
• With ProLink II: ProLink > Configuration > Discrete Input
• With ProLink III: Device Tools > Configuration > I/O > Action Assignment
• With the Field Communicator: Configure > Alert Setup > Discrete Events > Assign
Discrete Action
Options for Enhanced Event Action
Table 6-11: Options for Enhanced Event Action
Action
Display ProLink II
Standard
None (default)
Start sensor zero
Start/stop all totalizers
Reset mass total
Reset volume total
Reset gas standard volume total
Reset all totals
Meter verification
Start meter verification test
NONE
START ZERO
START STOP
RESET MASS
RESET VOL
RESET GSVT
RESET ALL
START VERFY
Label
ProLink III Field Communicator
None None None
Start Sensor Zero Start Sensor Zero Perform auto zero
Start/Stop All Totalization Start/Stop All Totalization Start/stop totals
Reset Mass Total
Reset Volume Total
Reset Gas Std Volume
Total
Reset All Totals
Start Meter Verification
Reset Mass Total
Reset Volume Total
Reset Gas Std Volume
Total
Reset All Totals
Start Meter Verification
Reset mass total
Reset volume total
Reset gas standard volume total
Reset totals
Not available
CAUTION!
Before assigning actions to an enhanced event or discrete input, check the status of the event or the remote input device. If it is ON, all assigned actions will be performed when the new configuration is implemented. If this is not acceptable, wait until an appropriate time to assign actions to the event or discrete input.
102
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
6.6
6.6.1
Integrate the meter with the control system
Configure digital communications
The digital communications parameters control how the transmitter will communicate using digital communications.
Your transmitter supports the following types of digital communications:
• HART/Bell 202 over the primary mA terminals
• HART/RS-485 over the RS-485 terminals
• Modbus/RS-485 over the RS-485 terminals
• Modbus RTU via the service port
Note
The service port responds automatically to a wide range of connection requests. It is not configurable.
Configure HART/Bell 202 communications
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
OFF-LINE MAINT
> OFF-LINE CONFG > COMM
ProLink > Configuration > Device > Digital Comm Settings
Device Tools > Configuration > Communications > Communications (HART)
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Communications > HART Communications
Overview
HART/Bell 202 communications parameters support HART communication with the transmitter's primary mA terminals over a HART/Bell 202 network.
•
•
The HART/Bell 202 communications parameters include:
•
HART Address
(Polling Address)
•
Loop Current Mode
Burst Parameters
HART Variables
(ProLink II) or mA Output Action (ProLink III)
(optional)
(optional)
Procedure
1.
Set HART Address to a unique value on your network.
Valid address values are between 0 and 15. The default address (0) is typically used unless you are in a multidrop environment.
Tip
Devices using HART protocol to communicate with the transmitter may use either HART
Address or HART Tag (Software Tag) to identify the transmitter. Configure either or both, as required by your other HART devices.
Configuration and Use Manual
103
Integrate the meter with the control system
2.
Ensure Loop Current Mode (mA Output Action) is configured appropriately.
Options
Enabled
Disabled
Description
The primary mA output reports process data as configured.
The primary mA output is fixed at 4 mA and does not report process data.
Important
If you use ProLink II or ProLink III to set HART Address to
0
, the program automatically enables
Loop Current Mode . If you use ProLink II or ProLink III to set HART Address to any other value, the program automatically disables Loop Current Mode. This is designed to make it easier to configure the transmitter for legacy behavior. Always verify Loop Current Mode after setting
HART Address
.
3.
(Optional) Enable and configure Burst Parameters.
Tip
In typical installations, burst mode is disabled. Enable burst mode only if another device on the network requires burst mode communication.
4.
(Optional) Configure HART Variables.
Configure burst parameters
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Device > Burst Setup
Device Tools > Configuration > Communications > Communications (HART)
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Communications > Set Up Burst Mode
Overview
Burst mode is a mode of communication during which the transmitter regularly broadcasts HART digital information over the mA output. The burst parameters control the information that is broadcast when burst mode is enabled.
Tip
In typical installations, burst mode is disabled. Enable burst mode only if another device on the network requires burst mode communication.
Procedure
1.
Enable Burst Mode.
2.
Set Burst Mode Output as desired.
104
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Integrate the meter with the control system
Label
ProLink II
Primary Variable
PV current & % of range
ProLink III
Source (Primary
Variable)
Primary Variable
(Percent Range/
Current)
Dynamic vars & PV current
Process Variables/
Current
Transmitter vars Transmitter variables
Field Communicator
PV
% range/current
Process variables/ current
Fld dev var
Description
The transmitter sends the primary variable (PV) in the configured measurement units in each burst
(e.g., 14.0 g/sec, 13.5 g/sec,
12.0 g/sec).
The transmitter sends the PV’s percent of range and the PV’s actual mA level in each burst (e.g., 25%,
11.0 mA).
The transmitter sends PV, SV, TV, and QV values in measurement units and the PV’s actual milliamp reading in each burst (e.g.,
50 g/sec, 23 °C, 50 g/sec,
0.0023 g/cm3, 11.8 mA).
The transmitter sends four userspecified process variables in each burst.
3.
Ensure that the burst output variables are set appropriately.
• If you set Burst Mode Output to send four user-specified variables, set the four process variables to be sent in each burst.
• If you set Burst Mode Output to any other option, ensure that the HART variables are set as desired.
Configure HART variables (PV, SV, TV, QV)
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Variable Mapping
Device Tools > Configuration > Communications > Communications (HART)
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Variable Mapping
Overview
The HART variables are a set of four variables predefined for HART use. The HART variables include the Primary Variable (PV), Secondary Variable (SV), Tertiary Variable (TV), and
Quaternary Variable (QV). You can assign specific process variables to the HART variables, and then use standard HART methods to read or broadcast the assigned process data.
Configuration and Use Manual
105
Integrate the meter with the control system
Restriction
The TV is automatically set to match the PV and cannot be configured independently.
Options for HART variables
Table 6-12: Options for HART variables
Process variable
Mass flow rate
Line (Gross) Volume flow rate
Mass total
Line (Gross) Volume total
Mass inventory
Line (Gross) Volume inventory
Gas standard volume flow rate
Gas standard volume total
Gas standard volume inventory
✓
✓
Primary Variable (PV)
✓
✓
Secondary
Variable (SV)
✓ ✓
✓
✓
Third Variable
(TV)
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Fourth Variable (QV )
✓
Interaction of HART variables and transmitter outputs
The HART variables are automatically reported through specific transmitter outputs. They may also be reported through HART burst mode, if enabled on your transmitter.
Table 6-13: HART variables and transmitter outputs
HART variable
Primary Variable (PV)
Secondary Variable (SV)
Tertiary Variable (TV)
Quaternary Variable (QV)
Reported via
Primary mA output
Not associated with an output
Frequency output (if present on your transmitter)
Not associated with an output
Comments
If one assignment is changed, the other is changed automatically, and vice versa.
The SV must be configured directly, and the value of the
SV is available only via digital communications.
If one assignment is changed, the other is changed automatically, and vice versa. If your transmitter does not have a frequency output, the TV must be configured directly, and the value of the TV is available only via digital communications.
The QV must be configured directly, and the value of the
QV is available only via digital communications.
106
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
6.6.2
Integrate the meter with the control system
Configure HART/RS-485 communications
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > COMM
ProLink
> Configuration > Device > Digital Comm Settings > HART Address
ProLink
> Configuration > RS-485
Device Tools
> Configuration > Communications > Communications (HART)
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Communications > HART Communications
Overview
HART/RS-485 communications parameters support HART communication with the transmitter's RS-485 terminals.
HART/RS-485 communication parameters include:
•
Protocol
• HART Address (Polling Address)
•
Parity
, Stop Bits, and Baud Rate
Restriction
The transmitter uses the same RS-485 terminals for HART/RS-485, Modbus RTU, and Modbus ASCII communications. All RS-485 connection requests must use the same protocol and connection parameters that are configured in the transmitter.
Procedure
1.
Set Protocol to HART RS-485.
2.
Set Baud Rate to match the baud rate that will be used by your HART master.
3.
Set Parity to match the parity that will be used by your HART master.
4.
Set Stop Bits to match the stop bits setting that will be used by your HART master.
5.
Set HART Address to a unique value on your network.
Valid address values are between 0 and 15. The default address (0) is typically used unless you are in a multidrop environment.
Tip
Devices using HART protocol to communicate with the transmitter may use either HART
Address
or HART Tag (Software Tag) to identify the transmitter. Configure either or both, as required by your other HART devices.
Configuration and Use Manual
107
Integrate the meter with the control system
6.6.3
108
Configure Modbus/RS-485 communications
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > OFF-LINE CONFG > COMM
ProLink
> Configuration > Device > Digital Comm Settings
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Communications > RS-485 Terminals
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Inputs/Outputs > Communications > Set Up RS-485 Port
Overview
Modbus/RS-485 communications parameters control Modbus communication with the transmitter's RS-485 terminals.
Modbus/RS-485 communications parameters include:
•
Disable Modbus ASCII
•
Protocol
•
Modbus Address
(Slave Address)
•
Parity
, Stop Bits, and Baud Rate
•
Floating-Point Byte Order
•
Additional Communications Response Delay
Restriction
To configure Floating-Point Byte Order or Additional Communications Response Delay, you must use ProLink II.
Procedure
1.
Set Disable Modbus ASCII as desired.
Support for Modbus ASCII limits the set of addresses that are available for the transmitter's Modbus address.
Modbus ASCII support
Disabled
Enabled
Available Modbus addresses
1–127, excluding 111 (111 is reserved to the service port)
1–15, 32–47, 64–79, and 96–110
2.
Set Protocol to match the protocol used by your Modbus/RS-485 host.
Options
Modbus RTU (default)
Modbus ASCII
Description
8–bit communications
7–bit communications
If support for Modbus ASCII is disabled, you must use Modbus RTU.
3.
Set Modbus Address to a unique value on the network.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
6.6.4
Integrate the meter with the control system
4.
Set Parity, Stop Bits, and Baud Rate as appropriate for your network.
5.
Set Floating-Point Byte Order to match the byte order used by your Modbus host.
2
3
Code
0
1
Byte order
1–2 3–4
3–4 1–2
2–1 4–3
4–3 2–1
for the bit structure of bytes 1, 2, 3, and 4.
Table 6-14: Bit structure of floating-point bytes
Byte
1
Bits
SEEEEEEE
2
3
4
EMMMMMMM
MMMMMMMM
MMMMMMMM
Definition
S=Sign
E=Exponent
E=Exponent
M=Mantissa
M=Mantissa
M=Mantissa
6.
(Optional) Set Additional Communications Response Delay in “delay units.”
A delay unit is 2/3 of the time required to transmit one character, as calculated for the port currently in use and the character transmission parameters. Valid values range from 1 to 255.
Additional Communications Response Delay
is used to synchronize Modbus communications with hosts that operate at a slower speed than the transmitter. The value specified here will be added to each response the transmitter sends to the host.
Tip
Do not set Additional Communications Response Delay unless required by your Modbus host.
Configure Digital Communications Fault Action
Display
ProLink II
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Device > Digital Comm Settings > Digital Comm Fault Setting
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Fault Processing
Field Communicator Configure > Alert Setup > I/O Fault Actions > Comm Fault Action
Configuration and Use Manual
109
Integrate the meter with the control system
Overview
Digital Communications Fault Action
specifies the values that will be reported via digital communications if the transmitter encounters an internal fault condition.
Procedure
Set Digital Communications Fault Action as desired.
The default setting is None.
Options for Digital Communications Fault Action
Table 6-15: Options for Digital Communications Fault Action
ProLink II
Upscale
Label
ProLink III
Upscale
Field Communicator
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Not-a-Number (NAN)
Flow to Zero
None
(default)
Downscale
Zero
Not a Number
Flow to Zero
None
Downscale
IntZero-All 0
Not-a-Number
IntZero-Flow 0
None
(default)
Description
• Process variable values indicate that the value is greater than the upper sensor limit.
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
• Process variable values indicate that the value is greater than the upper sensor limit.
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
• Flow rate variables go to the value that represents a flow rate of 0 (zero).
• Density is reported as
0
.
• Temperature is reported as
0 °C
, or the equivalent if other units are used (e.g.,
32 °F
).
• Drive gain is reported as measured.
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
•
Process variables are reported as
IEEE
NAN
.
• Drive gain is reported as measured.
• Modbus scaled integers are reported as
Max Int
.
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
• Flow rates are reported as
0
.
• Other process variables are reported as measured.
• Totalizers stop incrementing.
• All process variables are reported as measured.
• Totalizers increment if they are running.
110
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Integrate the meter with the control system
CAUTION!
If you set mA Output Fault Action or Frequency Output Fault Action to None, be sure to set Digital
Communications Fault Action
to None. If you do not, the output will not report actual process data,
and this may result in measurement errors or unintended consequences for your process.
Restriction
If you set Digital Communications Fault Action to NAN, you cannot set mA Output Fault Action or Frequency
Output Fault Action to None. If you try to do this, the transmitter will not accept the configuration.
Configuration and Use Manual
111
Integrate the meter with the control system
112
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
7
7.1
Completing the configuration
Completing the configuration
Topics covered in this chapter:
•
Test or tune the system using sensor simulation
•
Back up transmitter configuration
•
Enable write-protection on the transmitter configuration
Test or tune the system using sensor simulation
Use sensor simulation to test the system's response to a variety of process conditions, including boundary conditions, problem conditions, or alarm conditions, or to tune the loop.
Restriction
Sensor simulation is available only on flowmeters with the enhanced core processor.
Prerequisites
Before enabling sensor simulation, ensure that your process can tolerate the effects of the simulated process values.
Procedure
1.
Navigate to the sensor simulation menu.
Communications tool
Display
ProLink II
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Menu path
Not available
ProLink > Configuration > Sensor Simulation
Device Tools > Diagnostics > Testing > Sensor Simulation
Service Tools
> Simulate > Simulate Sensor
2.
Enable sensor simulation.
3.
For mass flow, set Wave Form as desired and enter the required values.
Option
Fixed
Sawtooth
Required values
Fixed Value
Period
Minimum
Maximum
Configuration and Use Manual
113
Completing the configuration
7.1.1
114
Option
Sine
Required values
Period
Minimum
Maximum
4.
For density, set Wave Form as desired and enter the required values.
Option
Fixed
Sawtooth
Sine
Required values
Fixed Value
Period
Minimum
Maximum
Period
Minimum
Maximum
5.
For temperature, set Wave Form as desired and enter the required values.
Option
Fixed
Sawtooth
Sine
Required values
Fixed Value
Period
Minimum
Maximum
Period
Minimum
Maximum
6.
Observe the system response to the simulated values and make any appropriate changes to the transmitter configuration or to the system.
7.
Modify the simulated values and repeat.
8.
When you have finished testing or tuning, disable sensor simulation.
Sensor simulation
Sensor simulation allows you to test the system or tune the loop without having to create the test conditions in your process. When sensor simulation is enabled, the transmitter reports the simulated values for mass flow, density, and temperature, and takes all appropriate actions. For example, the transmitter might apply a cutoff, activate an event, or post an alarm.
When sensor simulation is enabled, the simulated values are stored in the same memory locations used for process data from the sensor. The simulated values are then used throughout transmitter functioning. For example, sensor simulation will affect:
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
7.2
Completing the configuration
• All mass flow rate, temperature, and density values shown on the display or reported via outputs or digital communications
• The mass total and mass inventory values
• All volume calculations and data, including reported values, volume totals, and volume inventories
• All mass, temperature, density, or volume values logged to Data Logger
Sensor simulation does not affect any diagnostic values.
Unlike actual mass flow rate and density values, the simulated values are not temperaturecompensated (adjusted for the effect of temperature on the sensor’s flow tubes).
Back up transmitter configuration
ProLink II and ProLink III provide a configuration upload/download function which allows you to save configuration sets to your PC. This allows you to back up and restore your transmitter configuration. It is also a convenient way to replicate a configuration across multiple devices.
Prerequisites
One of the following:
• An active connection from ProLink II
• An active connection from ProLink III
Restriction
This function is not available with any other communications tools.
Procedure
• To back up the transmitter configuration using ProLink II:
1. Choose File > Load from Xmtr to File.
2. Specify a name and location for the backup file, and click Save.
3. Select the options that you want to include in the backup file, and click Download
Configuration .
• To back up the transmitter configuration using ProLink III:
1. Choose Device Tools > Configuration Transfer > Save or Load Configuration Data.
2. In the Configuration groupbox, select the configuration data you want to save.
3. Click Save, then specify a file name and location on your computer.
4. Click Start Save.
The backup file is saved to the specified name and location. It is saved as a text file and can be read using any text editor.
Configuration and Use Manual
115
Completing the configuration
7.3
Enable write-protection on the transmitter configuration
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > CONFIG > LOCK
ProLink
> Configuration > Device > Enable Write Protection
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Write-Protection
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Info Parameters > Transmitter Info > Write Protect
Overview
If the transmitter is write-protected, the configuration is locked and nobody can change it until it is unlocked. This prevents accidental or unauthorized changes to the transmitter configuration parameters.
116
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Operations, maintenance, and troubleshooting
Part III
Operations, maintenance, and troubleshooting
Chapters covered in this part:
•
Transmitter operation
•
Measurement support
•
Troubleshooting
Configuration and Use Manual
117
Operations, maintenance, and troubleshooting
118
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Transmitter operation
8 Transmitter operation
Topics covered in this chapter:
•
Record the process variables
•
View process variables
•
View transmitter status using the status LED
•
View and acknowledge status alarms
•
Read totalizer and inventory values
•
Start and stop totalizers and inventories
•
Reset totalizers
•
Reset inventories
8.1
Process variable
Flow rate
Density
Temperature
Tube frequency
Pickoff voltage
Drive gain
Record the process variables
Micro Motion suggests that you make a record of specific process variable measurements, including the acceptable range of measurements, under normal operating conditions. This data will help you recognize when the process variables are unusually high or low, and may help you better diagnose and troubleshoot application issues.
Procedure
Record the following process variables, under normal operating conditions:
Typical average
Measurement
Typical high Typical low
Configuration and Use Manual
119
Transmitter operation
8.2
8.2.1
View process variables
Display
ProLink II
Scroll to the desired process variable. If AutoScroll is enabled, you can wait until the process variable is displayed. See
ProLink
> Process Variables
ProLink III
View the desired variable on the main screen under Process Variables. See
for more information.
Field Communicator Overview > Shortcuts > Variables > Process Variables
Overview
Process variables provide information about the state of the process fluid, such as flow rate, density, and temperature, as well as running totals. Process variables can also provide data about flowmeter operation, such as drive gain and pickoff voltage. This information can be used to understand and troubleshoot your process.
View process variables using the display
View the desired process variable(s).
If you are using the transmitter display, by default the display shows the mass flow rate, mass total, volume flow rate, volume total, temperature, density, and drive gain. The display reports the abbreviated name of the process variable (for example, DENS for density), the current value of that process variable, and the associated unit of measure (for example, G/CM3).
If desired, you can configure the display to show other process variables, such as totalizers and inventories.
If Auto Scroll is enabled, the display cycles through the configured display variables, showing each display variable for a user-specified number of seconds.
120
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
8.2.2
Transmitter operation
Figure 8-1: Transmitter display features
A
B
H
G
C
F
D
E
A. Status LED
B. Display (LCD panel)
C. Process variable
D. Scroll optical switch
E. Optical switch indicator: turns red when either Scroll or Select is activated
F. Select optical switch
G. Unit of measure for process variable
H. Current value of process variable
View process variables using ProLink III
When you connect to a device, the process variables are displayed on the main screen of
ProLink III.
Procedure
View the desired process variable(s).
Tip
ProLink III allows you to choose the process variables that appear on the main screen. You can also choose whether to view data in Analog Gauge view or digital view, and you can customize the gauge settings. For more information, see the ProLink III user manual.
Configuration and Use Manual
121
Transmitter operation
8.3
View transmitter status using the status LED
The status LED shows the current alarm condition of the transmitter. The status LED is located on the face of the transmitter.
Observe the status LED.
• If your transmitter has a display, you can view the status LED with the transmitter housing cover in place.
• If your transmitter does not have a display, it does not have a status LED. This option is not available.
To interpret the status LED, see the following table.
Restriction
If LED Blinking is disabled, the status LED will flash only during calibration. It will not flash to indicate an unacknowledged alarm.
Table 8-1: Status LED states
LED behavior Alarm condition
Solid green No alarm
Flashing green No active alarm
Solid yellow
Flashing yellow
Solid red
Flashing red
Active low-severity alarm
Active low-severity alarm
Active high-severity alarm
Active high-severity alarm
Description
Normal operation
Previously active alarm has not been acknowledged
Alarm has been acknowledged
Alarm has not been acknowledged
Alarm has been acknowledged
Alarm has not been acknowledged
8.4
8.4.1
View and acknowledge status alarms
The transmitter posts status alarms whenever a process variable exceeds its defined limits or the transmitter detects a fault condition. You can view active alarms, and you can acknowledge alarms.
View and acknowledge alarms using the display
You can view a list containing all alarms that are active, or inactive but unacknowledged.
From this list, you can acknowledge individual alarms.
Note
Only Fault and Informational alarms are listed. The transmitter automatically filters out alarms with
Status Alarm Severity
set to Ignore.
122
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Transmitter operation
Prerequisites
Operator access to the alarm menu must be enabled (default setting). If operator access to the alarm menu is disabled, you must use another method to view or acknowledge status alarms.
Procedure
See
Configuration and Use Manual
123
Transmitter operation
Figure 8-2: Using the display to view and acknowledge the status alarms
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
SEE ALARM
Is ACK ALL enabled?
No
Select
Yes
ACK ALL
Yes No
Scroll
Scroll
EXIT
Select Scroll
Alarm code
Yes
Active/ unacknowledged alarms?
No
NO ALARM
Select
Select
Yes
ACK
No
Scroll
Scroll
EXIT
124
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
8.4.2
Transmitter operation
Postrequisites
• To clear the following alarms, you must correct the problem, acknowledge the alarm, then power-cycle the transmitter: A001, A002, A010, A011, A012, A013,
A018, A019, A022, A023, A024, A025, A028, A029, A031.
• For all other alarms:
If the alarm is inactive when it is acknowledged, it will be removed from the list.
If the alarm is active when it is acknowledged, it will be removed from the list when the alarm condition clears.
View and acknowledge alarms using ProLink II
You can view a list containing all alarms that are active, or inactive but unacknowledged.
From this list, you can acknowledge individual alarms.
1.
Choose ProLink > Alarm Log.
2.
Choose the High Priority or Low Priority panel.
Note
The grouping of alarms into these two categories is hard-coded and is not affected by Status
Alarm Severity .
All active or unacknowledged alarms are listed:
• Red indicator: Alarm is currently active.
• Green indicator: Alarm is inactive but unacknowledged.
Note
Only Fault and Informational alarms are listed. The transmitter automatically filters out alarms with Status Alarm Severity set to Ignore.
3.
To acknowledge an alarm, check the Ack checkbox.
Postrequisites
• To clear the following alarms, you must correct the problem, acknowledge the alarm, then power-cycle the transmitter: A001, A002, A010, A011, A012, A013,
A018, A019, A022, A023, A024, A025, A028, A029, A031.
• For all other alarms:
If the alarm is inactive when it is acknowledged, it will be removed from the list.
If the alarm is active when it is acknowledged, it will be removed from the list when the alarm condition clears.
Configuration and Use Manual
125
Transmitter operation
8.4.3
8.4.4
View and acknowledge alerts using ProLink III
You can view a list containing all alerts that are active, or inactive and have been unacknowleged. From this list, you can acknowlege individual alerts or choose to acknowledge all alerts at once.
1.
View alerts on the ProLink III main screen under Alerts.
All active or unacknowledged alarms are listed, and displayed according to the following categories:
Category
Failed: Fix Now
Description
A meter failure has occurred and must be addressed immediately.
Maintenance: Fix Soon A condition has occurred that can be fixed at a later time.
Advisory: Informational
A condition has occurred, but requires no maintenance from you.
Notes
• All fault alerts are displayed in the Failed: Fix Now category.
• All information alerts are displayed in either the Maintenance: Fix Soon category or the
Advisory: Informational
category. The category assignment is hard-coded.
• The transmitter automatically filters out alerts with Alert Severity set to Ignore.
2.
To acknowledge a single alert, check the Ack checkbox for that alert. To acknowledge all alerts at once, click Ack All.
Postrequisites
•
•
To clear the following alarms, you must correct the problem, acknowledge the alarm, then power-cycle the transmitter: A001, A002, A010, A011, A012, A013,
A018, A019, A022, A023, A024, A025, A028, A029, A031.
For all other alarms:
If the alarm is inactive when it is acknowledged, it will be removed from the list.
If the alarm is active when it is acknowledged, it will be removed from the list when the alarm condition clears.
View alarms using the Field Communicator
You can view a list containing all alarms that are active, or inactive but unacknowledged.
• To view active or unacknowledged alarms, press Service Tools > Alerts.
All active alarms or unacknowledged alarms are listed.
Note
Only Fault and Informational alarms are listed. The transmitter automatically filters out alarms with Status Alarm Severity set to Ignore.
126
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Transmitter operation
• To refresh the list of active or unacknowledged alarms, press Service Tools > Alerts >
Refresh Alerts
.
8.4.5
Alarm data in transmitter memory
The transmitter maintains three sets of data for every alarm that is posted.
For each alarm occurrence, the following three sets of data are maintained in transmitter memory:
• Alert List
• Alert Statistics
• Recent Alerts
Table 8-2: Alarm data in transmitter memory
Alarm data structure Transmitter action if condition occurs
Alert List
Alert Statistics
Recent Alerts
Contents
As determined by the alarm status bits, a list of:
• All currently active alarms
• All previously active alarms that have not been acknowledged
One record for each alarm (by alarm number) that has occurred since the last master reset.
Each record contains:
• A count of the number of occurrences
• Timestamps for the most recent posting and clearing
50 most recent alarm postings or alarm clearings
Clearing
Cleared and regenerated with every transmitter power cycle
Not cleared; maintained across transmitter power cycles
Not cleared; maintained across transmitter power cycles
8.5
Read totalizer and inventory values
Display
ProLink II
To read a totalizer or inventory value from the display, it must be configured as a display variable.
ProLink
> Totalizer Control
ProLink III View the desired variable on the main screen under Process Variables.
Field Communicator Service Tools > Variables > Totalizer Control
Configuration and Use Manual
127
Transmitter operation
8.6
8.6.1
128
Overview
Totalizers keep track of the total amount of mass or volume measured by the transmitter since the last totalizer reset. Inventories keep track of the total amount of mass or volume measured by the transmitter since the last inventory reset.
Tip
You can use the inventories to keep a running total of mass or volume across multiple totalizer resets.
Start and stop totalizers and inventories
Display
ProLink II
See
.
ProLink > Totalizer Control > Start
ProLink > Totalizer Control > Stop
ProLink III
Device Tools
> Totalizer Control > Totalizer and Inventories > Start All Totals
Device Tools > Totalizer Control > Totalizer and Inventories > Stop All Totals
Field Communicator Service Tools > Variables > Totalizer Control > All Totalizers > Start Totalizers
Service Tools
> Variables > Totalizer Control > All Totalizers > Stop Totalizers
Overview
When you start a totalizer, it tracks process measurement. In a typical application, its value increases with flow. When you stop a totalizer, it stops tracking process measurement and its value does not change with flow. Inventories are started and stopped automatically, when totalizers are started and stopped.
Important
Totalizers and inventories are started or stopped as a group. When you start any totalizer, all other totalizers and all inventories are started simultaneously.When you stop any totalizer, all other totalizers and all inventories are stopped simultaneously. You cannot start or stop inventories directly.
Start and stop totalizers and inventories using the display
Prerequisites
The Totalizer Start/Stop display function must be enabled.
At least one totalizer must be configured as a display variable.
Procedure
• To start all totalizers and inventories using the display:
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Transmitter operation
•
1. Scroll until the word TOTAL appears in the lower left corner of the display.
Important
Because all totalizers are started or stopped together, it does not matter which total you use.
2. Select.
3. Scroll until START appears beneath the current totalizer value.
4. Select.
5. Select again to confirm.
6. Scroll to EXIT.
To stop all totalizers and inventories using the display:
1. Scroll until the word TOTAL appears in the lower left corner of the display.
Important
Because all totalizers are started or stopped together, it does not matter which total you use.
2. Select.
3. Scroll until STOP appears beneath the current totalizer value.
4. Select.
5. Select again to confirm.
6. Scroll to EXIT.
Configuration and Use Manual
129
Transmitter operation
8.7
8.7.1
130
Reset totalizers
Display
ProLink II
See
.
ProLink
> Totalizer Control > Reset Mass Total
ProLink
> Totalizer Control > Reset Volume Total
ProLink
> Totalizer Control > Reset Gas Volume Total
ProLink > Totalizer Control > Reset
ProLink III
Device Tools
> Totalizer Control > Totalizer and Inventories > Reset Mass Total
Device Tools
> Totalizer Control > Totalizer and Inventories > Reset Volume Total
Device Tools > Totalizer Control > Totalizer and Inventories > Reset Gas Total
Device Tools > Totalizer Control > Totalizer and Inventories > Reset All Totals
Field Communicator Service Tools > Variables > Totalizer Control > Mass > Mass Total
Service Tools > Variables > Totalizer Control > Gas Standard Volume > Volume Total
Service Tools > Variables > Totalizer Control > Gas Standard Volume > GSV Total
Service Tools > Variables > Totalizer Control > All Totalizers > Reset All Totals
Overview
When you reset a totalizer, the transmitter sets its value to 0. It does not matter whether the totalizer is started or stopped. If the totalizer is started, it continues to track process measurement.
Tip
When you reset a single totalizer, the values of other totalizers are not reset. Inventory values are not reset.
Reset totalizers using the display
Prerequisites
The Totalizer Reset display function must be enabled.
The totalizer that you want to reset must be configured as a display variable. For example:
• If you want to reset the mass totalizer, Mass Total must be configured as a display variable.
• If you want to reset the volume totalizer, Volume Total must be configured as a display variable.
Procedure
• To reset the mass totalizer:
1. Scroll until the mass totalizer value appears.
2. Select.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
8.8
Transmitter operation
3. Scroll until RESET appears beneath the current totalizer value.
4. Select.
5. Select again to confirm.
6. Scroll to EXIT.
7. Select.
• To reset the volume totalizer:
1. Scroll until the volume totalizer value appears.
2. Select.
3. Scroll until RESET appears beneath the current totalizer value.
4. Select.
5. Select again to confirm.
6. Scroll to EXIT.
7. Select.
• To reset the gas standard volume totalizer:
1. Scroll until the gas standard volume totalizer value appears.
2. Select.
3. Scroll until RESET appears beneath the current totalizer value.
4. Select.
5. Select again to confirm.
6. Scroll to EXIT.
7. Select.
Reset inventories
ProLink II
ProLink III
ProLink
> Totalizer Control > Reset Inventories
ProLink
> Totalizer Control > Reset Mass Inventory
ProLink
> Totalizer Control > Reset Volume Inventory
ProLink > Totalizer Control > Reset Gas Volume Inventory
Device Tools
> Totalizer Control > Totalizer and Inventories > Reset Mass Inventory
Device Tools
> Totalizer Control > Totalizer and Inventories > Reset Volume Inventory
Device Tools > Totalizer Control > Totalizer and Inventories > Reset Gas Inventory
Device Tools > Totalizer Control > Totalizer and Inventories > Reset All Inventories
Configuration and Use Manual
131
Transmitter operation
Overview
When you reset an inventory, the transmitter sets its value to 0. It does not matter whether the inventory is started or stopped. If the inventory is started, it continues to track process measurement.
Tip
When you reset a single inventory, the values of other inventories are not reset. Totalizer values are not reset.
Prerequisites
To use ProLink II or ProLink III to reset the inventories, the feature must be enabled.
• To enable inventory reset in ProLink II:
1. Click View > Preferences.
2. Check the Enable Inventory Totals Reset checkbox.
3. Click Apply.
• To enable inventory reset in ProLink III:
1. Choose Tools > Options.
2. Select Reset Inventories from ProLink III.
132
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Measurement support
9
9.1
9.2
Measurement support
Topics covered in this chapter:
•
Options for measurement support
•
Use Smart Meter Verification
•
Zero the flowmeter
•
Validate the meter
•
Perform a (standard) D1 and D2 density calibration
•
Perform a D3 and D4 density calibration (T-Series sensors only)
•
Perform temperature calibration
Options for measurement support
Micro Motion provides several measurement support procedures to help you evaluate and maintain your flowmeter's accuracy.
The following methods are available:
• Smart Meter Verification evaluates the structural integrity of the sensor tubes by comparing current tube stiffness to the stiffness measured at the factory. Stiffness is defined as the load per unit deflection, or force divided by displacement. Because a change in structural integrity changes the sensor’s response to mass and density, this value can be used as an indicator of measurement performance.
• Meter validation compares flowmeter measurements reported by the transmitter to an external measurement standard. Meter validation requires one data point.
• Calibration establishes the relationship between a process variable and the signal produced at the sensor. You can calibrate the flowmeter for zero, density, and temperature. Density and temperature calibration require two data points (low and high) and an external measurement for each.
Tips
•
•
•
Perform Smart Meter Verification at regular intervals to get the best data on your meter's performance.
To prove the meter against a regulatory standard, or to correct measurement error, use meter validation and meter factors.
Before performing a field calibration, contact Micro Motion to see if there is an alternative. In many cases, field calibrations have a negative effect on measurement accuracy.
Use Smart Meter Verification
You can run a Smart Meter Verification test, view and interpret the results, and set up automatic execution.
Configuration and Use Manual
133
Measurement support
9.2.1
9.2.2
Smart Meter Verification requirements
To use Smart Meter Verification, the transmitter must be paired with an enhanced core processor, and the Smart Meter Verification option must be ordered for the transmitter.
See
for the minimum version of the transmitter, enhanced core processor, and communication tool needed to support Smart Meter Verification. (If you are going to perform Smart Meter Verification using the display, only the transmitter and enhanced core processor versions apply.)
Table 9-1: Minimum version to support Smart Meter Verification
Item
Transmitter
Enhanced core processor
ProLink II
ProLink III
Field Communicator
Minimum version
6.0
3.6
2.9
1.0
HART device description: device rev 6, DD rev 2
If your devices or tools do not meet the minimum version requirements for Smart Meter
Verification, you still may have access to an older version of meter verification if the option was ordered for your transmitter. See
for a description of the major differences between the older meter verification and the newer Smart Meter Verification.
Table 9-2: Major differences between meter verification and Smart Meter
Verification
Feature
Measurement interruption
Result storage
Results reporting
Test start methods
Meter verification (older) Smart Meter Verification (newer)
Suspended during the test (3 minutes)
No interruption necessary
No results stored in the transmitter Last 20 results stored in the transmitter
Pass/fail/abort
Manual only
Pass/fail/abort, abort code, comparison tables and graphs for stored test results
(1)
Manual, scheduled, event-based
Smart Meter Verification test preparation
Although it is not necessary to match factory conditions or change the transmitter's configuration during a Smart Meter Verification test, the test will run more smoothly when conditions are stable.
(1) Detailed test analyses such as comparison graphs are not available on the local display.
134
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
9.2.3
Measurement support
Smart Meter Verification has an output mode called Continuous Measurement that allows the transmitter to keep measuring while the test is in progress. If you choose to run the test in
Last Measured Value
or Fault modes instead, the transmitter outputs will be held constant for the two minute duration of the test. If control loops depend on transmitter outputs, take appropriate action.
Avoid process instability during the test. If conditions are too unstable, the Smart Meter
Verification test will abort. To maximize process stability:
• Maintain a constant fluid pressure and temperature.
• Avoid changes to fluid composition, e.g., two-phase flow or settling.
• Maintain a constant flow rate.
Tips
•
•
The Smart Meter Verification test runs best when flow is stopped through the sensor.
Smart Meter Verification is not affected by any configured transmitter parameters for flow, density, or temperature.
Run Smart Meter Verification
Run a Smart Meter Verification test using the display
1.
Navigate to the Smart Meter Verification menu.
Figure 9-1: Smart Meter Verification – Top-level menu
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
Scroll
ENTER METER VERFY
Select
RUN VERFY
Select
Scroll
RESULTS READ
Select
Scroll
SCHEDULE VERFY
Select
Scroll
EXIT
Scroll Select
2.
Choose Run Verfy.
3.
Choose Outputs and select the desired output behavior.
Option
Continue
Measr
Fault
Description
During the test, all outputs will continue to report their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately 90 seconds.
During the test, all outputs will report the last measured value of their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
Configuration and Use Manual
135
Measurement support
Option
Last Value
Description
During the test, all outputs will go to their configured fault action. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
While the test is in progress, dots traverse the display and test progress is shown.
Postrequisites
View the test results and take any appropriate actions.
136
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Measurement support
Smart Meter Verification flowchart: Running a test using the display
Figure 9-2: Running a Smart Meter Verification test using the display
RUN VERFY
Select
Scroll
EXIT OUTPUTS
Select
CONTINUE MEASR
Select
Scroll
FAULT
Select
Scroll
LAST VALUE
Select
Scroll
EXIT
ARE YOU SURE/YES?
Select
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x%
Select
SENSOR ABORT/YES?
Scroll Select
PASS VERFY
Scroll
RESULTS VIEW/YES?
Scroll Select
To Runcount
(see Results Read)
Pass Test result
Fail
CAUTION VERFY
Scroll
Abort
ABORTED VERFY
Scroll
Abort Type
Scroll
RERUN/YES?
Yes No
Correct condition
Scroll
To Enter Meter Verfy
Select
Run a Smart Meter Verification test using ProLink II
1.
Choose Tools > Meter Verification > Run Meter Verification.
Configuration and Use Manual
137
Measurement support
138
You may need to wait a few seconds while ProLink II synchronizes its database with the transmitter data.
2.
Review the information presented on the screen, and click Next.
3.
Enter any desired information on the Test Definition screen, and click Next.
All information on this screen is optional.
4.
Choose the desired output behavior.
Option
Outputs Continue
Measuring
Description
During the test, all outputs will continue to report their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately 90 seconds.
Outputs Held at Last
Value
During the test, all outputs will report the last measured value of their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately
140 seconds.
Outputs Held at Fault
During the test, all outputs will go to their configured fault action. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
5.
Press Start Meter Verification.
Test progress is displayed on the screen.
Postrequisites
View the test results and take any appropriate actions.
Run a Smart Meter Verification test using ProLink III
1.
Choose Device Tools > Diagnostics > Meter Verification > Run Test.
You may need to wait a few seconds while ProLink II synchronizes its database with the transmitter data.
2.
Enter any desired information on the Test Definition screen, and click Next.
All information on this screen is optional.
3.
Choose the desired output behavior.
Option Description
Continue Measuring
During the test, all outputs will continue to report their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately 90 seconds.
Held at Last Value During the test, all outputs will report the last measured value of their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
Held at Fault
During the test, all outputs will go to their configured fault action. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
4.
Press Start.
Test progress is displayed on the screen.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Measurement support
9.2.4
Postrequisites
View the test results and take any appropriate actions.
Run a Smart Meter Verification test using the
Field Communicator
1.
Navigate to the Smart Meter Verification menu:
• Overview > Shortcuts > Meter Verification
• Service Tools > Maintenance > Routine Maintenance > Meter Verification
2.
Choose Manual Verification.
3.
Choose Start.
4.
Set output behavior as desired, and press OK if prompted.
Option Description
Continue Measuring During the test, all outputs will continue to report their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately 90 seconds.
Outputs Held at Last
Value
During the test, all outputs will report the last measured value of their assigned process variable. The test will run for approximately
140 seconds.
Outputs Held at Fault During the test, all outputs will go to their configured fault action. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
Test progress is displayed on the screen.
Postrequisites
View the test results and take any appropriate actions.
View test data
You can view the results of the current test. You can also view results from previous tests.
The transmitter stores the following information about the last twenty Smart Meter
Verification tests:
• Powered-on hours at the time of the test.
• Test result (Pass, Fail, Abort).
• Stiffness of the left and right pickoffs, shown as percentage variation from the factory value. If the test aborted, 0 is stored for these values.
• Abort code, if applicable.
In addition, ProLink II and ProLink III provide a detailed test reporting and analysis framework. This information is stored on the PC where ProLink II or ProLink III is installed. It includes:
• Timestamp from the PC clock
Configuration and Use Manual
139
Measurement support
• Current flowmeter identification data
• Current flow and density configuration parameters
• Current zero values
• Current process values for mass flow rate, volume flow rate, density, temperature, and external pressure
• Customer and test descriptions (if entered by the user)
If you use ProLink II or ProLink III to run a test, a test result chart and a test report are displayed at the completion of the test. On-screen directions are provided to manipulate the test data or export the data to a CSV file for offline analysis.
View test result data using the display
1.
If you have just run a test, results are displayed automatically at the end of the test.
2.
If you want to view results from previous tests: a. Navigate to the Smart Meter Verification menu.
Figure 9-3: Smart Meter Verification – Top-level menu
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
Scroll
ENTER METER VERFY
Select
RUN VERFY
Select
Scroll
RESULTS READ
Select
Scroll
SCHEDULE VERFY
Select
Scroll
Scroll
EXIT
Select b. Scroll to Results Read and press Select.
The runcount of the most recent test is displayed.
c. To view data for this test, press Select, then press Scroll to scroll through test data.
d. To select a different test, press Scroll, then press Select when the transmitter displays Results More?. When the desired test appears, as identified by runcount, press Select.
140
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Measurement support
Smart Meter Verification flowchart: Viewing test results using the display
Figure 9-4: Viewing Smart Meter Verification test results using the display
RESULTS READ
Select
RUNCOUNT x
Scroll
xx HOURS
Select
PASS
Select
xx L STF%
Select
xx R STF%
Select
Pass
Select
Result type
Fail xx HOURS
Select
CAUTION
Select
xx L STF%
Select
xx R STF%
Select
Abort xx HOURS
Select
Abort Type
Select
To Runcount x-1
RESULTS MORE?
Select Scroll
To Run Verfy
Configuration and Use Manual
141
Measurement support
View test result data using ProLink II
1.
Choose Tools > Meter Verification > Run Meter Verification and click View Previous Test Results and Print Report .
The chart shows test results for all tests stored in the ProLink II database.
2.
(Optional) Click Next to view and print a test report.
3.
(Optional) Click Export Data to CSV File to save the data to a file on your PC.
View test result data using ProLink III
1.
Choose Device Tools > Diagnostics > Meter Verification and click Previous Test Results.
The chart shows test results for all tests stored in the ProLink III database.
2.
(Optional) Click Next to view and print a test report.
3.
(Optional) Click Export Data to CSV File to save the data to a file on your PC.
View test result data using the Field Communicator
1.
Navigate to the Smart Meter Verification menu:
•
Overview
> Shortcuts > Meter Verification
•
Service Tools
> Maintenance > Routine Maintenance > Meter Verification
2.
(Optional) If the Field Communicator database is out of date, choose Upload Results
Data from Device .
3.
To view data from the most recent test, choose Most Recent Test Results.
4.
To view data for all tests in the Field Communicator database: a. Press Show Results Table.
Data from the most recent test is displayed.
b. Press OK to scroll through data from previous tests.
c. To exit the results table, press Abort.
Smart Meter Verification results interpretation
When the meter verification test is completed, the result is reported as Pass, Fail, or Abort.
(Some tools report the Fail result as Caution instead.)
Pass
The test result is within the specification uncertainty limit. In other words, the stiffness of the left and right pickoffs match the factory values plus or minus the specification uncertain limit. If transmitter zero and configuration match factory values, the sensor will meet factory specifications for flow and density measurement. It is expected that meters will pass meter verification every time the test is run.
142
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Measurement support
Fail
The test result is not within the specification uncertainty limit. Micro Motion recommends that you immediately repeat the meter verification test. If during the failed test you had set outputs to Continue Measurement, set outputs to Fault or
Last Measured Value
instead.
•
•
If the meter passes the second test, the first result can be ignored.
If the meter fails the second test, the flow tubes may be damaged. Use your process knowledge to determine the possibilities for damage and the appropriate actions for each. These actions might include removing the meter from service and physically inspecting the tubes. At minimum, you should perform a flow validation and a density calibration.
Abort
A problem occurred with the meter verification test (e.g., process instability) or
you stopped the test manually. See
for a list of abort codes, a descript of each code, and possible actions you can take in response.
Table 9-3: Smart Meter Verification abort codes
Code
1
3
5
8
13
14
15
Other
Description
User-initiated abort
Frequency drift
High drive gain
Unstable flow
Recommended actions
None required. Wait 15 seconds before starting another test.
Ensure that temperature, flow, and density are stable, and rerun the test.
Ensure that flow is stable, minimize entrained gas, and rerun the test.
Check factors that could cause process instability, then rerun the test. To maximize process stability:
• Maintain a constant fluid pressure and temperature.
• Avoid changes to fluid composition, e.g., two-phase flow or settling.
• Maintain a constant flow rate.
Contact Micro Motion.
No factory reference data for meter verification test performed on air
No factory reference data for meter verification test performed on water
No configuration data for meter verification
General abort
Contact Micro Motion.
Contact Micro Motion.
Repeat the test. If the test aborts again, contact Micro Motion.
9.2.5
Schedule automatic execution of the Smart Meter
Verification test
You can set up and run a single test at a user-defined future time. You can also set up and run tests on a regular schedule.
Configuration and Use Manual
143
Measurement support
Manage scheduled test execution using the display
1.
Navigate to the Smart Meter Verification menu.
Figure 9-5: Smart Meter Verification – Top-level menu
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
Scroll
ENTER METER VERFY
Select
RUN VERFY
Select
Scroll
RESULTS READ
Select
Scroll
SCHEDULE VERFY
Select
Scroll
EXIT
Scroll Select
2.
Scroll to Schedule Verfy and press Select.
3.
To schedule a single test or the first test in recurring execution: a. Scroll to Set Next and press Select.
b. Enter the number of hours that the transmitter will wait before beginning the test.
4.
To schedule recurring execution: a. Scroll to Set Recur and press Select.
b. Enter the number of hours that will elapse between tests.
5.
To disable scheduled execution:
• To disable execution of a single scheduled test, set Set Next to 0.
• To disable recurring execution, set Set Recur to 0.
• To disable all scheduled execution, choose Turn Off Sched when you enter the
Smart Meter Verification menu.
144
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Measurement support
Smart Meter Verification flowchart: Scheduling test execution using the display
Figure 9-6: Scheduling Smart Meter Verification test execution using the display
SCHEDULE VERFY
Select
No Schedule set?
SCHED IS OFF
Scroll
Yes
TURN OFF SCHED/YES?
Scroll
HOURS LEFT
Scroll Select
xx HOURS
Select
Select
Schedule deleted
SET NEXT
Select
xx HOURS
Scroll
SAVE/YES?
No Yes
Select
Scroll
SET RECUR
Select
xx HOURS
Scroll
SAVE/YES?
No Yes
Select
Scroll
Scroll
EXIT
Select
Manage scheduled test execution using ProLink II
1.
Choose Tools > Meter Verification > Schedule Meter Verification.
2.
To schedule a single test or the first test in recurring execution, specify a value for
Hours Until Next Run .
3.
To schedule recurring execution, specify a value for Hours Between Recurring Runs.
Configuration and Use Manual
145
Measurement support
9.3
146
4.
To disable scheduled execution:
• To disable execution of a single scheduled test, set Hours Until Next Run to 0.
• To disable recurring execution, set Hours Between Recurring Runs to 0.
• To disable all scheduled execution, click Turn Off Schedule.
Manage scheduled test execution using ProLink III
1.
Choose Device Tools > Diagnostics > Meter Verification > Schedule Meter Verification.
2.
To schedule a single test or the first test in recurring execution, specify a value for
Hours Until Next Run .
3.
To schedule recurring execution, specify a value for Hours Between Recurring Runs.
4.
To disable scheduled execution:
• To disable execution of a single scheduled test, set Hours Until Next Run to 0.
• To disable recurring execution, set Hours Between Recurring Runs to 0.
• To disable all scheduled execution, click Disable Scheduled Execution.
Manage scheduled test execution using the
Field Communicator
1.
Navigate to the Smart Meter Verification menu:
•
Overview
> Shortcuts > Meter Verification
•
Service Tools
> Maintenance > Routine Maintenance > Meter Verification
2.
Choose Automatic Verification.
3.
To schedule a single test or the first test in recurring execution, specify a value for
Hrs Until Next Run .
4.
To schedule recurring execution, specify a value for Set Recurring Hours.
5.
To disable scheduled execution:
• To disable execution of a single scheduled test, set Hrs Until Next Run to 0.
• To disable recurring execution, set Set Recurring Hours to 0.
• To disable all scheduled execution, choose Turn Off Schedule.
Zero the flowmeter
Zeroing the flowmeter establishes a baseline for process measurement by analyzing the sensor's output when there is no flow through the sensor tubes.
Important
In most cases, the factory zero is more accurate than the field zero. Do not zero the flowmeter unless one of the following is true:
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
9.3.1
Measurement support
•
•
The zero is required by site procedures.
The stored zero value fails the Zero Verification procedure.
Prerequisites
Before performing a field zero, execute the Zero Verification procedure to see whether or not a field zero can improve measurement accuracy. See
.
Important
Do not verify the zero or zero the flowmeter if a high-severity alarm is active. Correct the problem, then verify the zero or zero the flowmeter. You may verify the zero or zero the flowmeter if a lowseverity alarm is active.
Zero the flowmeter using the display
Zeroing the flowmeter establishes a baseline for process measurement by analyzing the sensor's output when there is no flow through the sensor tubes.
Restriction
You cannot change the Zero Time setting from the display. The current setting of Zero Time will be applied to the zero procedure. The default value is 20 seconds. If you need to change Zero Time, you must make a connection to the transmitter from a communications tool such as ProLink II.
Prerequisites
•
•
Assign the following as display variables:
• Live Zero or Field Verification Zero
Drive Gain
Temperature
• Density
See
for assistance.
Procedure
1.
Prepare the flowmeter: a. Allow the flowmeter to warm up for at least 20 minutes after applying power.
b. Run the process fluid through the sensor until the sensor temperature reaches the normal process operating temperature.
c. Stop flow through the sensor by shutting the downstream valve, and then the upstream valve if available.
d. Verify that the sensor is blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full of process fluid.
e. Observe the drive gain, temperature, and density readings. If they are stable, check the Live Zero or Field Verification Zero value. If the average value is close to 0, you should not need to zero the flowmeter.
Configuration and Use Manual
147
Measurement support
9.3.2
148
2.
Navigate to OFFLINE MAINT > ZERO > CAL ZERO and select CAL/YES?.
Dots traverse the display while flowmeter zero is in progress.
3.
Read the zero result on the display.
The display reports CAL PASS if the zero was successful, or CAL FAIL if it was not.
Postrequisites
Restore normal flow through the sensor by opening the valves.
•
•
Need help?
If the zero fails:
•
•
•
Ensure that there is no flow through the sensor, then retry.
Remove or reduce sources of electromechanical noise, then retry.
Set Zero Time to a lower value, then retry.
If the zero continues to fail, contact Micro Motion.
If you want to return the flowmeter to operation using a previous zero value:
To restore the zero value set at the factory: OFFLINE MAINT > ZERO > RESTORE ZERO >
RESTORE/YES?
. This function requires the enhanced core processor.
Restriction
Restore the factory zero only if your flowmeter was purchased as a unit, it was zeroed at the factory, and you are using the original components.
Zero the flowmeter using ProLink II
Zeroing the flowmeter establishes a baseline for process measurement by analyzing the sensor's output when there is no flow through the sensor tubes.
Prerequisites
ProLink II must be running and must be connected to the transmitter.
Procedure
1.
Prepare the flowmeter: a. Allow the flowmeter to warm up for at least 20 minutes after applying power.
b. Run the process fluid through the sensor until the sensor temperature reaches the normal process operating temperature.
c. Stop flow through the sensor by shutting the downstream valve, and then the upstream valve if available.
d. Verify that the sensor is blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full of process fluid.
e. Observe the drive gain, temperature, and density readings. If they are stable, check the Live Zero or Field Verification Zero value. If the average value is close to 0, you should not need to zero the flowmeter.
2.
Choose ProLink > Calibration > Zero Verification and Calibration.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
9.3.3
Measurement support
3.
Click Calibrate Zero.
4.
Modify Zero Time, if desired.
Zero Time
controls the amount of time the transmitter takes to determine its zeroflow reference point. The default Zero Time is 20 seconds. For most applications, the default Zero Time is appropriate.
5.
Click Perform Auto Zero.
The Calibration in Progress light will turn red during the zero procedure. At the end of the procedure:
• If the zero procedure was successful, the Calibration in Progress light returns to green and a new zero value is displayed.
• If the zero procedure failed, the Calibration Failure light turns red.
Postrequisites
Restore normal flow through the sensor by opening the valves.
•
•
Need help?
If the zero fails:
•
•
•
Ensure that there is no flow through the sensor, then retry.
Remove or reduce sources of electromechanical noise, then retry.
Set Zero Time to a lower value, then retry.
If the zero continues to fail, contact Micro Motion.
If you want to return the flowmeter to operation using a previous zero value:
To restore the zero value set at the factory: ProLink > Zero Verification and Calibration > Calibrate
Zero
> Restore Factory Zero .This function requires the enhanced core processor.
To restore the most recent valid value from transmitter memory: ProLink > Zero Verification and Calibration
> Calibrate Zero > Restore Prior Zero . Restore Prior Zero is available only while the
Flow Calibration window is open. If you close the Flow Calibration window, you will no longer be able to restore the prior zero.
Restriction
Restore the factory zero only if your flowmeter was purchased as a unit, it was zeroed at the factory, and you are using the original components.
Zero the flowmeter using ProLink III
Zeroing the flowmeter establishes a baseline for process measurement by analyzing the sensor's output when there is no flow through the sensor tubes.
Prerequisites
ProLink III must be running and must be connected to the transmitter.
Procedure
1.
Prepare the flowmeter:
Configuration and Use Manual
149
Measurement support a. Allow the flowmeter to warm up for at least 20 minutes after applying power.
b. Run the process fluid through the sensor until the sensor temperature reaches the normal process operating temperature.
c. Stop flow through the sensor by shutting the downstream valve, and then the upstream valve if available.
d. Verify that the sensor is blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full of process fluid.
e. Observe the drive gain, temperature, and density readings. If they are stable, check the Live Zero or Field Verification Zero value. If the average value is close to 0, you should not need to zero the flowmeter.
2.
Choose Device Tools > Calibration > Zero Verification and Calibration.
3.
Click Calibrate Zero.
4.
Modify Zero Time, if desired.
Zero Time
controls the amount of time the transmitter takes to determine its zeroflow reference point. The default Zero Time is 20 seconds. For most applications, the default Zero Time is appropriate.
5.
Click Calibrate Zero.
The Calibration in Progress message is displayed. When the calibration is complete:
• If the zero procedure was successful, a Calibration Success message and a new zero value are displayed.
• If the zero procedure failed, a Calibration Failed message is displayed.
Postrequisites
Restore normal flow through the sensor by opening the valves.
•
•
•
•
Need help?
If the zero fails:
• Ensure that there is no flow through the sensor, then retry.
Remove or reduce sources of electromechanical noise, then retry.
Set Zero Time to a lower value, then retry.
If the zero continues to fail, contact Micro Motion.
If you want to return the flowmeter to operation using a previous zero value:
To restore the zero value set at the factory: Device Tools > Zero Verification and Calibration >
Calibrate Zero
> Restore Factory Zero . This function requires the enhanced core processor.
To restore the most recent valid value from transmitter memory: Device Tools > Zero
Verification and Calibration > Calibrate Zero > Restore Prior Zero . Restore Prior Zero is available only while the Flow Calibration window is open. If you close the Flow Calibration window, you will no longer be able to restore the prior zero.
Restriction
Restore the factory zero only if your flowmeter was purchased as a unit, it was zeroed at the factory, and you are using the original components.
150
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
9.3.4
Measurement support
Zero the flowmeter using the Field Communicator
Zeroing the flowmeter establishes a baseline for process measurement by analyzing the sensor's output when there is no flow through the sensor tubes.
1.
Prepare the flowmeter: a. Allow the flowmeter to warm up for at least 20 minutes after applying power.
b. Run the process fluid through the sensor until the sensor temperature reaches the normal process operating temperature.
c. Stop flow through the sensor by shutting the downstream valve, and then the upstream valve if available.
d. Verify that the sensor is blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full of process fluid.
e. Observe the drive gain, temperature, and density readings. If they are stable, check the Live Zero or Field Verification Zero value. If the average value is close to 0, you should not need to zero the flowmeter.
2.
Press Service Tools > Maintenance > Zero Calibration > Perform Auto Zero.
3.
Modify Zero Time, if desired.
Zero Time controls the amount of time the transmitter takes to determine its zeroflow reference point. The default Zero Time is 20 seconds. For most applications, the default Zero Time is appropriate.
4.
Press OK to start the zero, and wait while the zero calibration is performed.
5.
When the zero is complete, data from the zero calibration is displayed.
• Press OK to accept the data and store the values.
• Press ABORT to discard the data and return to the previous zero values.
Postrequisites
Restore normal flow through the sensor by opening the valves.
•
•
•
Need help?
If the zero fails:
•
•
Ensure that there is no flow through the sensor, then retry.
Remove or reduce sources of electromechanical noise, then retry.
Set Zero Time to a lower value, then retry.
If the zero continues to fail, contact Micro Motion.
If you want to return the flowmeter to operation using a previous zero value:
To restore the zero value set at the factory: Service Tools > Maintenance > Zero Calibration >
Restore Factory Zero . This function requires the enhanced core processor.
Restriction
Restore the factory zero only if your flowmeter was purchased as a unit, it was zeroed at the factory, and you are using the original components.
Configuration and Use Manual
151
Measurement support
9.4
Validate the meter
Display
ProLink II
OFF-LINE MAINT > CONFG > UNITS > MTR F
ProLink
> Configuration > Flow
ProLink III Device Tools > Configuration > Process Measurement > Flow
Device Tools
> Configuration > Process Measurement > Density
Field Communicator Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Flow
Configure > Manual Setup > Measurements > Density
Overview
Meter validation compares flowmeter measurements reported by the transmitter to an external measurement standard. If the transmitter value for mass flow, volume flow, or density measurement is significantly different from the external measurement standard, you may want to adjust the corresponding meter factor. The flowmeter’s actual measurement is multiplied by the meter factor, and the resulting value is reported and used in further processing.
Prerequisites
Identify the meter factor(s) that you will calculate and set. You may set any combination of the three meter factors: mass flow, volume flow, and density. Note that all three meter factors are independent:
• The meter factor for mass flow affects only the value reported for mass flow.
• The meter factor for density affects only the value reported for density.
• The meter factor for volume flow affects only the value reported for volume flow or gas standard volume flow.
Important
To adjust volume flow, you must set the meter factor for volume flow. Setting a meter factor for mass flow and a meter factor for density will not produce the desired result. The volume flow calculations are based on original mass flow and density values, before the corresponding meter factors have been applied.
If you plan to calculate the meter factor for volume flow, be aware that validating volume in the field may be expensive, and the procedure may be hazardous for some process fluids. Therefore, because volume is inversely proportional to density, an alternative to direct measurement is to calculate the meter factor for volume flow from the meter factor
for instructions on this method.
Obtain a reference device (external measurement device) for the appropriate process variable.
Important
For good results, the reference device must be highly accurate.
152
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Measurement support
9.4.1
Procedure
1.
Determine the meter factor as follows: a. Use the flowmeter to take a sample measurement.
b. Measure the same sample using the reference device.
c. Calculate the meter factor using the following formula:
NewMeterFactor
=
ConfiguredMeterFactor x
ReferenceMeasurement
FlowmeterMeasurement
2.
Ensure that the calculated meter factor is between 0.8 and 1.2, inclusive. If the meter factor is outside these limits, contact Micro Motion customer service.
3.
Configure the meter factor in the transmitter.
Example: Calculating the meter factor for mass flow
The flowmeter is installed and validated for the first time. The mass flow measurement from the transmitter is 250.27 lb. The mass flow measurement from the reference device is 250 lb. The mass flow meter factor is calculated as follows:
MeterFactor
MassFlow
=
1 x
250
250.27
= 0.9989
The first meter factor for mass flow is 0.9989.
One year later, the flowmeter is validated again. The mass flow measurement from the transmitter is 250.07 lb. The mass flow measurement from the reference device is
250.25 lb. The new mass flow meter factor is calculated as follows:
MeterFactor
MassFlow
=
0.9989
x
250.25
250.07
= 0.9996
The new meter factor for mass flow is 0.9996.
Alternate method for calculating the meter factor for volume flow
The alternate method for calculating the meter factor for volume flow is used to avoid the difficulties that may be associated with the standard method.
This alternate method is based on the fact that volume is inversely proportional to density.
It provides partial correction of the volume flow measurement by adjusting for the portion of the total offset that is caused by the density measurement offset. Use this method only when a volume flow reference is not available, but a density reference is available.
Procedure
1.
Calculate the meter factor for density, using the standard method (see
).
2.
Calculate the meter factor for volume flow from the meter factor for density:
Configuration and Use Manual
153
Measurement support
9.5
9.5.1
MeterFactor
Volume
=
1
MeterFactor
Density
Note
The following equation is mathematically equivalent to the first equation. You may use whichever version you prefer.
MeterFactor
Volume
=
ConfiguredMeterFactor
Density x
Density
Flowmeter
Density
ReferenceDevice
3.
Ensure that the calculated meter factor is between 0.8 and 1.2, inclusive. If the meter factor is outside these limits, contact Micro Motion customer service.
4.
Configure the meter factor for volume flow in the transmitter.
Perform a (standard) D1 and D2 density calibration
Density calibration establishes the relationship between the density of the calibration fluids and the signal produced at the sensor. Density calibration includes the calibration of the D1 (low-density) and D2 (high-density) calibration points.
Important
Micro Motion flowmeters are calibrated at the factory, and normally do not need to be calibrated in the field. Calibrate the flowmeter only if you must do so to meet regulatory requirements. Contact
Micro Motion before calibrating the flowmeter.
Tip
Micro Motion recommends using meter validation and meter factors, rather than calibration, to prove the meter against a regulatory standard or to correct measurement error.
Perform a D1 and D2 density calibration using ProLink II
Prerequisites
• During density calibration, the sensor must be completely filled with the calibration fluid, and flow through the sensor must be at the lowest rate allowed by your application. This is usually accomplished by closing the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor, then filling the sensor with the appropriate fluid.
• D1 and D2 density calibration require a D1 (low-density) fluid and a D2 (highdensity) fluid. You may use air and water.
154
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Measurement support
• If LD Optimization is enabled on your meter, disable it. To do this, choose ProLink >
Configuration
> Sensor and ensure that the checkbox is not checked. LD Optimization is used only with large sensors in hydrocarbon applications. In some installations, only
Micro Motion customer service has access to this parameter. If this is the case, contact Micro Motion before continuing.
• The calibrations must be performed without interruption, in the order shown. Make sure that you are prepared to complete the process without interruption.
• Before performing the calibration, record your current calibration parameters. You can do this by saving the current configuration to a file on the PC. If the calibration fails, restore the known values.
Restriction
For T-Series sensors, the D1 calibration must be performed on air and the D2 calibration must be performed on water.
Procedure
See
Figure 9-7: D1 and D2 density calibration using ProLink II
Close shutoff valve downstream from sensor
D1 calibration
Fill sensor with D1 fluid
D2 calibration
Fill sensor with D2 fluid
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Density cal – Point 1
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Density cal – Point 2
Enter density of D1 fluid
Do Cal
Calibration in Progress light turns red
Calibration in Progress light turns green
Close
Enter density of D2 fluid
Do Cal
Calibration in Progress light turns red
Calibration in Progress light turns green
Close
Done
Configuration and Use Manual
155
Measurement support
9.5.2
Postrequisites
If you disabled LD Optimization before the calibration procedure, re-enable it.
Perform a D1 and D2 density calibration using ProLink III
Prerequisites
•
•
•
•
•
During density calibration, the sensor must be completely filled with the calibration fluid, and flow through the sensor must be at the lowest rate allowed by your application. This is usually accomplished by closing the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor, then filling the sensor with the appropriate fluid.
D1 and D2 density calibration require a D1 (low-density) fluid and a D2 (highdensity) fluid. You may use air and water.
If LD Optimization is enabled on your meter, disable it. To do this, choose Device Tools >
Configuration
> LD Optimization. LD Optimization is used only with large sensors in hydrocarbon applications. In some installations, only Micro Motion customer service has access to this parameter. If this is the case, contact Micro Motion before continuing.
The calibrations must be performed without interruption, in the order shown. Make sure that you are prepared to complete the process without interruption.
Before performing the calibration, record your current calibration parameters. You can do this by saving the current configuration to a file on the PC. If the calibration fails, restore the known values.
Restriction
For T-Series sensors, the D1 calibration must be performed on air and the D2 calibration must be performed on water.
Procedure
See
156
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Measurement support
Figure 9-8: D1 and D2 density calibration using ProLink III
Close shutoff valve downstream from sensor
D1 calibration
Fill sensor with D1 fluid
D2 calibration
Fill sensor with D2 fluid
Device Tools >
Calibration >
Density Calibration >
Density Calibration – Point 1 (Air)
Enter density of D1 fluid
Start Calibration
Close
Device Tools >
Calibration >
Density Calibration >
Density Calibration – Point 2 (Water)
Enter density of D2 fluid
Start Calibration
Close
9.5.3
Done
Postrequisites
If you disabled LD Optimization before the calibration procedure, re-enable it.
Perform a D1 and D2 density calibration using the
Field Communicator
Prerequisites
• During density calibration, the sensor must be completely filled with the calibration fluid, and flow through the sensor must be at the lowest rate allowed by your application. This is usually accomplished by closing the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor, then filling the sensor with the appropriate fluid.
• D1 and D2 density calibration require a D1 (low-density) fluid and a D2 (highdensity) fluid. You may use air and water.
• If LD Optimization is enabled on your meter, disable it. To do this, choose Configure >
Manual Setup
> Measurements > LD Optimization. LD Optimization is used only with large sensors in hydrocarbon applications. In some installations, only Micro Motion customer service has access to this parameter. If this is the case, contact
Micro Motion before continuing.
• The calibrations must be performed without interruption, in the order shown. Make sure that you are prepared to complete the process without interruption.
Configuration and Use Manual
157
Measurement support
• Before performing the calibration, record your current calibration parameters. If the calibration fails, restore the known values.
Restriction
For T-Series sensors, the D1 calibration must be performed on air and the D2 calibration must be performed on water.
Procedure
See
Figure 9-9: D1 and D2 density calibration using the Field Communicator
Close shutoff valve downstream from sensor
D1 calibration
Fill sensor with D1 fluid
On-Line Menu >
Service Tools >
Maintenance >
Density Calibration
Dens Pt 1
Calibration method
executes
Enter density of D1 fluid
OK
Calibration in Progress message
Density Calibration
Complete message
OK
Home
D2 calibration
Fill sensor with D2 fluid
Service Tools >
Maintenance >
Density Calibration
Dens Pt 2
Calibration method
executes
Enter density of D2 fluid
OK
Calibration in Progress message
Density Calibration
Complete message
OK
Home
Done
Postrequisites
If you disabled LD Optimization before the calibration procedure, re-enable it.
158
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
9.6
9.6.1
Measurement support
Perform a D3 and D4 density calibration (T-
Series sensors only)
For T-Series sensors, the optional D3 and D4 calibration could improve the accuracy of the density measurement if the density of your process fluid is less than 0.8 g/cm than 1.2 g/cm
3
.
3
or greater
If you perform the D3 and D4 calibration, note the following:
• Do not perform the D1 and D2 calibration.
• Perform the D3 calibration if you have one calibrated fluid.
• Perform both the D3 and D4 calibrations if you have two calibrated fluids (other than air and water). The calibrations must be performed without interruption, in the order shown. Make sure that you are prepared to complete the process without interruption.
Perform a D3 or D3 and D4 density calibration using
ProLink II
Prerequisites
• During density calibration, the sensor must be completely filled with the calibration fluid, and flow through the sensor must be at the lowest rate allowed by your application. This is usually accomplished by closing the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor, then filling the sensor with the appropriate fluid.
• For D3 density calibration, the D3 fluid must meet the following requirements:
Minimum density of 0.6 g/cm
3
Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm the density of water.
3
between the density of the D3 fluid and the density of water. The density of the D3 fluid may be either greater or less than
•
•
For D4 density calibration, the D4 fluid must meet the following requirements:
Minimum density of 0.6 g/cm
3
Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm density of the D3 fluid.
3
between the density of the D4 fluid and the density of the D3 fluid. The density of the D4 fluid must be greater than the
Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm the density of water.
3
between the density of the D4 fluid and the density of water. The density of the D4 fluid may be either greater or less than
Before performing the calibration, record your current calibration parameters. You can do this by saving the current configuration to a file on the PC. If the calibration fails, restore the known values.
Procedure
See
Configuration and Use Manual
159
Measurement support
Figure 9-10: D3 or D3 and D4 density calibration using ProLink II
Close shutoff valve downstream from sensor
D3 calibration
Fill sensor with D3 fluid
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Density cal – Point 3
Enter density of D3 fluid
Do Cal
Calibration in Progress light turns red
Calibration in Progress light turns green
Close
Done
D4 calibration
Fill sensor with D4 fluid
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Density cal – Point 4
Enter density of D4 fluid
Do Cal
Calibration in Progress light turns red
Calibration in Progress light turns green
Close
Done
9.6.2
Perform a D3 or D3 and D4 density calibration using
ProLink III
Prerequisites
•
•
During density calibration, the sensor must be completely filled with the calibration fluid, and flow through the sensor must be at the lowest rate allowed by your application. This is usually accomplished by closing the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor, then filling the sensor with the appropriate fluid.
For D3 density calibration, the D3 fluid must meet the following requirements:
Minimum density of 0.6 g/cm
3
Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm the density of water.
3
between the density of the D3 fluid and the density of water. The density of the D3 fluid may be either greater or less than
• For D4 density calibration, the D4 fluid must meet the following requirements:
Minimum density of 0.6 g/cm
3
160
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Measurement support
•
Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm density of the D3 fluid.
3
between the density of the D4 fluid and the density of the D3 fluid. The density of the D4 fluid must be greater than the
Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm the density of water.
3
between the density of the D4 fluid and the density of water. The density of the D4 fluid may be either greater or less than
Before performing the calibration, record your current calibration parameters. You can do this by saving the current configuration to a file on the PC. If the calibration fails, restore the known values.
Procedure
See
Figure 9-11: D3 or D3 and D4 density calibration using ProLink III
Close shutoff valve downstream from sensor
D3 calibration
Fill sensor with D3 fluid
D4 calibration
Fill sensor with D4 fluid
Device Tools >
Calibration >
Density Calibration >
Density Calibration – Point 3
Enter density of D3 fluid
Start Calibration
Close
Device Tools >
Calibration >
Density Calibration >
Density Calibration – Point 4
Enter density of D4 fluid
Start Calibration
Close
9.6.3
Done
Perform a D3 or D3 and D4 density calibration using the
Field Communicator
Prerequisites
• During density calibration, the sensor must be completely filled with the calibration fluid, and flow through the sensor must be at the lowest rate allowed by your application. This is usually accomplished by closing the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor, then filling the sensor with the appropriate fluid.
Configuration and Use Manual
161
Measurement support
• For D3 density calibration, the D3 fluid must meet the following requirements:
Minimum density of 0.6 g/cm
3
Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm the density of water.
3
between the density of the D3 fluid and the density of water. The density of the D3 fluid may be either greater or less than
• For D4 density calibration, the D4 fluid must meet the following requirements:
Minimum density of 0.6 g/cm
3
Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm density of the D3 fluid.
3
between the density of the D4 fluid and the density of the D3 fluid. The density of the D4 fluid must be greater than the
Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm the density of water.
3
between the density of the D4 fluid and the density of water. The density of the D4 fluid may be either greater or less than
• Before performing the calibration, record your current calibration parameters. If the calibration fails, restore the known values.
Procedure
See
162
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Measurement support
Figure 9-12: D3 or D3 and D4 density calibration using the Field Communicator
Close shutoff valve downstream from sensor
D3 calibration
Fill sensor with D3 fluid
On-Line Menu >
Service Tools >
Maintenance >
Density Calibration
Dens Pt 3 T-Series
Calibration method
executes
Enter density of D3 fluid
OK
Calibration in Progress message
Density Calibration
Complete message
OK
Home
D4 calibration
Fill sensor with D4 fluid
Service Tools >
Maintenance >
Density Calibration
Dens Pt 4 T-Series
Calibration method
executes
Enter density of D4 fluid
OK
Calibration in Progress message
Density Calibration
Complete message
OK
Home
Done
Done
9.7
Perform temperature calibration
Temperature calibration establishes the relationship between the temperature of the calibration fluids and the signal produced by the sensor.
Prerequisites
The temperature calibration is a two-part procedure: temperature offset calibration and temperature slope calibration. The two parts must be performed without interruption, in the order shown. Make sure that you are prepared to complete the process without interruption.
You must use ProLink II or ProLink III to calibrate for temperature.
Configuration and Use Manual
163
Measurement support
Important
Consult Micro Motion before performing a temperature calibration. Under normal circumstances, the temperature circuit is stable and should not need an adjustment.
Procedure
See
.
Figure 9-13: Temperature calibration using ProLink II
Temperature Offset calibration
Fill sensor with lowtemperature fluid
Wait until sensor achieves thermal equilibrium
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Temp offset cal
Enter temperature of lowtemperature fluid
Do Cal
Calibration in Progress light turns red
Calibration in Progress light turns green
Close
Temperature Slope calibration
Fill sensor with hightemperature fluid
Wait until sensor achieves thermal equilibrium
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Temp slope cal
Enter temperature of hightemperature fluid
Do Cal
Calibration in Progress light turns red
Calibration in Progress light turns green
Close
Done
164
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Measurement support
Figure 9-14: Temperature calibration using ProLink III
Temperature Offset calibration
Fill sensor with lowtemperature fluid
Temperature Slope calibration
Fill sensor with hightemperature fluid
Wait until sensor achieves thermal equilibrium
Wait until sensor achieves thermal equilibrium
Device Tools >
Calibration >
Temperature Calibration >
Temperature Calibration - Offset
Device Tools >
Calibration >
Temperature Calibration >
Temperature Calibration - Slope
Enter temperature of lowtemperature fluid
Start Calibration
Enter temperature of hightemperature fluid
Start Calibration
Done
Configuration and Use Manual
165
Measurement support
166
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
10 Troubleshooting
Topics covered in this chapter:
•
Status LED states
•
Status alarms
•
Flow measurement problems
•
Density measurement problems
•
Temperature measurement problems
•
Milliamp output problems
•
Frequency output problems
•
Use sensor simulation for troubleshooting
•
Check power supply wiring
•
Check sensor-to-transmitter wiring
•
Check grounding
•
Perform loop tests
•
Check for radio frequency interference (RFI)
•
Check the HART communication loop
•
Check HART Address and Loop Current Mode
•
Check HART burst mode
•
Check the trimming of the mA output
•
Check Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value
•
Check mA Output Fault Action
•
Check Frequency Output Maximum Pulse Width
•
Check Frequency Output Scaling Method
•
Check Frequency Output Fault Action
•
Check Flow Direction
•
Check the cutoffs
•
Check for slug flow (two-phase flow)
•
Check the drive gain
•
Check the pickoff voltage
•
Check for electrical shorts
•
Check the core processor LED
•
Perform a core processor resistance test
Configuration and Use Manual
Troubleshooting
167
Troubleshooting
10.1
Status LED states
The status LED on the transmitter indicates whether or not alarms are active. If alarms are active, view the alarm list to identify the alarms, then take appropriate action to correct the alarm condition.
Your transmitter has a status LED only if it has a display.
If the transmitter has a display and LED Blinking is disabled, the status LED does not flash to indicate an unacknowledged alarm.
Table 10-1: Status LED states
Condition
Normal operation (no alarm)
Unacknowledged corrected condition (no alarm)
Acknowledged low-severity alarm (outputs continue to report process data)
Unacknowledged low-severity alarm (outputs continue to report process data)
Enabled
Disabled
N/A Acknowledged high-severity alarm (outputs in fault)
Unacknowledged high-severity alarm (outputs in fault)
LED Blinking
parameter LED behavior
N/A Solid green
Enabled
Disabled
N/A
Flashing green
Solid green
Solid yellow
Enabled
Disabled
Flashing yellow
Solid yellow
Solid red
Flashing red
Solid red
10.2
Status alarms
Table 10-2: Status alarms and recommended actions
Alarm code
A001
A002
Description Recommended actions
EEPROM Error (Core Processor) The transmitter has detected a problem communicating with the sensor. You can try cycling power to the meter to see if the condition clears. If not, the core processor must be replaced.
RAM Error (Core Processor) The transmitter has detected a problem communicating with the sensor. You can try cycling power to the meter to see if the condition clears. If not, the core processor must be replaced.
168
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
Table 10-2: Status alarms and recommended actions
(continued)
Alarm code
A003
A004
Description
No Sensor Response
Temperature Overrange
Recommended actions
The transmitter is not receiving one or more basic electrical signals from the sensor. This could mean that the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter has been damaged, or that the sensor requires factory service.
1. Check the drive gain and pickoff voltage. (See
2. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
a. Using the installation manual for your transmitter, verify that the transmitter is connected to the sensor according to the instructions. Obey all safety messages when opening wiring compartments.
b. Verify that the wires are making good contact with the terminals.
c. Perform RTD resistance checks and check for shorts to
d. Check the continuity of all wires from the transmitter to the sensor.
3. Check for electrical shorts. See
4. Check the integrity of the sensor tubes.
The sensor RTD is signaling a resistance that is out of range for the sensor.
1. Check the sensor RTD resistance values and for RTD shorts to case. (See
2. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
a. Using the installation manual for your transmitter, verify that the transmitter is connected to the sensor according to the instructions. Obey all safety messages when opening wiring compartments.
b. Verify that the wires are making good contact with the terminals.
c. Perform RTD resistance checks and check for shorts to
d. Check the continuity of all wires from the transmitter to the sensor.
3. Verify temperature characterization parameters (Temp Cal
Factor
).
4. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the flowmeter.
Configuration and Use Manual
169
Troubleshooting
Table 10-2: Status alarms and recommended actions
(continued)
Alarm code
A005
A006
Description
Mass Flow Rate Overrange
Characterization Required
Recommended actions
The sensor is signaling a flow rate that is out of range for the sensor.
1. If other alarms are present, resolve those alarm conditions first. If the current alarm persists, continue with the recommended actions.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the flowmeter.
3. Check for slug flow (two-phase flow).
a. Check for slug flow alarms. If slug flow is the problem, alarms will be posted.
b. Check the process for cavitation, flashing, or leaks.
c. Monitor the density of your process fluid output under normal process conditions.
The calibration factors for the sensor have not been entered, or the sensor type is incorrect, or the calibration factors are incorrect for the sensor type.
1. Verify that all of the characterization parameters match the data on the sensor tag.
2. Check the resistance of the LLC. (See
3. Check the Sensor Type parameter and make sure it matches your sensor type.
4. If Sensor Type is Curved Tube, make sure that none of the parameters specific to Straight Tube sensors have been set.
5. If all of the parameters are correct and the alarm persists, replace the core processor.
170
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
Table 10-2: Status alarms and recommended actions
(continued)
Alarm code
A008
A009
Description
Density Overrange
Transmitter Initializing/Warming Up
Recommended actions
The sensor is signaling a density reading below 0 g/cm
3
or above
10 g/cm
3
. Common causes for this alarm include partially filled flow tubes, excessive gas entrainment or flashing, tube fouling
(foreign material stuck in a tube, uneven coating on the inside of a tube, or a plugged tube), or tube deformation (a permanent change in tube geometry due to overpressure or hammer effect).
1. If other alarms are present, resolve those alarm conditions first. If the current alarm persists, continue with the recommended actions.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the flowmeter.
3. Check for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in the tubes, or coating in the tubes.
4. Check for slug flow (two-phase flow).
a. Check for slug flow alarms. If slug flow is the problem, alarms will be posted.
b. Check the process for cavitation, flashing, or leaks.
c. Monitor the density of your process fluid output under normal process conditions.
d. Check the values of Slug Low Limit, Slug High Limit, and Slug
Duration .
5. If accompanied by an A003 alarm, check for electrical shorts between sensor terminals or between the sensor terminals and the sensor case.
6. Verify that all of the characterization parameters match the data on the sensor tag.
7. Check the sensor coils (see
).
8. Check the drive gain and pickoff voltage.
9. Perform a density calibration.
10. Contact Micro Motion.
The transmitter is in power-up mode. Allow the transmitter to warm up. The alarm should clear automatically.
If the alarm does not clear:
1. Check that there is sufficient voltage at the core processor. A minimum of 11.5 VDC should be available at the core terminals at all times. If there is insufficient power on the core terminals, check that the transmitter is receiving sufficient power on the power terminals.
2. Make sure the sensor tubes are full of process fluid.
3. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
Configuration and Use Manual
171
Troubleshooting
Table 10-2: Status alarms and recommended actions
(continued)
Alarm code
A010
A011
A012
A013
A014
Description
Calibration Failure
Zero Calibration Failed: Low
Zero Calibration Failed: High
Zero Calibration Failed: Unstable
Transmitter Failure
Recommended actions
This alarm is typically caused by flow through the sensor during the zero, or by a zero offset result that is out of range. Power to the transmitter must be cycled to clear this alarm.
1. Cycle power to the meter.
2. Make sure there is no flow through the sensor.
3. Retry the zero calibration.
4. Power-cycle the transmitter.
This alarm is caused by reverse flow in the sensor during the zero, or by a zero offset result that is below the valid range. This alarm will be accompanied by A010. Power to the transmitter must be cycled to clear this alarm.
1. Cycle power to the meter.
2. Make sure there is no flow through the sensor.
3. Retry the zero calibration.
4. Power-cycle the transmitter.
This alarm is caused by positive flow in the sensor during the zero, or by a zero offset result that is above the valid range. This alarm will be accompanied by A010. Power to the transmitter must be cycled to clear this alarm.
1. Cycle power to the meter.
2. Make sure there is no flow through the sensor.
3. Retry the zero calibration.
4. Power-cycle the transmitter.
There was too much instability during the calibration procedure.
Power to the transmitter must be cycled to clear this alarm.
1. Remove or reduce sources of electromechanical noise (e.g., pumps, vibration, pipe stress).
• Check the drive gain and pickoff voltages to confirm that the sensor is in a stable state.
• Retry the procedure.
2. Cycle power to the meter, then retry the procedure.
1. Check that all wiring compartment covers are installed properly.
2. Check that the wiring connected to the transmitter meets specifications and that all cable shields are properly terminated.
3. Check that the sensor and transmitter are both grounded properly.
4. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the transmitter or wiring as necessary.
172
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
Table 10-2: Status alarms and recommended actions
(continued)
Alarm code
A016
A017
A018
Description
Sensor RTD Failure
T-Series RTD Failure
EEPROM Error (Transmitter)
Recommended actions
The sensor RTD is signaling a resistance that is out of range for the sensor.
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
a. Using the installation manual for your transmitter, verify that the transmitter is connected to the sensor according to the instructions. Obey all safety messages when opening wiring compartments.
b. Verify that the wires are making good contact with the terminals.
c. Perform RTD resistance checks and check for shorts to
d. Check the continuity of all wires from the transmitter to the sensor.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the flowmeter.
3. Contact Micro Motion.
The sensor RTD is signaling a resistance that is out of range for the sensor.
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
a. Using the installation manual for your transmitter, verify that the transmitter is connected to the sensor according to the instructions. Obey all safety messages when opening wiring compartments.
b. Verify that the wires are making good contact with the terminals.
c. Perform RTD resistance checks and check for shorts to
d. Check the continuity of all wires from the transmitter to the sensor.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the flowmeter. Temperature should be between –200 °F and +400 °F.
3. Verify that all of the characterization parameters match the data on the sensor tag.
4. Contact Micro Motion.
Power to the transmitter must be cycled to clear this alarm.
1. Check that all wiring compartment covers are installed properly.
2. Check that the wiring connected to the transmitter meets specifications and that shields are properly terminated.
3. Check that the sensor and transmitter are both grounded properly.
4. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the transmitter or wiring as necessary.
5. Cycle power to the transmitter.
6. If the problem persists, replace the transmitter.
Configuration and Use Manual
173
Troubleshooting
Table 10-2: Status alarms and recommended actions
(continued)
Alarm code
A019
A020
A021
A022
A023
A024
A025
Description
RAM Error (Transmitter)
No Flow Cal Value
Incorrect Sensor Type (K1)
Configuration Database Corrupt (Core Processor)
Internal Totals Corrupt (Core
Processor)
Program Corrupt (Core Processor)
Boot Sector Fault (Core Processor)
Recommended actions
Power to the transmitter must be cycled to clear this alarm.
1. Check that all wiring compartment covers are installed properly.
2. Check that the wiring connected to the transmitter meets specifications and that shields are properly terminated.
3. Check that the sensor and transmitter are both grounded properly.
4. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the transmitter or wiring as necessary.
5. Cycle power to the transmitter.
6. If the problem persists, replace the transmitter.
The flow calibration factor and/or K1 has not been entered since the last master reset. Verify that all of the characterization parameters match the data on the sensor tag. If the problem persists:
1. Check that the sensor type (curved or straight) is properly selected.
2. Confirm that no "T-series" calibration parameters have been set if this is a curved tube sensor.
The sensor is recognized as a straight tube but the K1 value indicates a curved tube, or vice versa. Verify that all of the characterization parameters match the data on the sensor tag. If the problem persists:
1. Check that the sensor type (curved or straight) is properly selected.
2. Confirm that no "T-Series" calibration parameters have been set if this is a curved tube sensor.
3. If this alarm occurs in conjunction with A006, check the LLC
resistance and for shorts to case (
).
Try cycling power to the meter to see if the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, replace the core processor.
Try cycling power to the meter to see if the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, replace the core processor.
Try cycling power to the meter to see if the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, replace the core processor.
Try cycling power to the meter to see if the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, replace the core processor.
174
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
Table 10-2: Status alarms and recommended actions
(continued)
Alarm code
A026
A027
A028
A029
A030
Description
Sensor/Transmitter Communications Failure
Security Breach
Core Processor Write Failure
PIC/Daughterboard Communications Failure
Incorrect Board Type
Recommended actions
The transmitter has lost communication with the core processor on the sensor. This alarm can be an indication of a problem with the core or the transmitter requiring the replacement of one or both parts.
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
a. Using the installation manual for your transmitter, verify that the transmitter is connected to the sensor according to the instructions. Obey all safety messages when opening wiring compartments.
b. Verify that the wires are making good contact with the terminals.
c. Perform RTD resistance checks and check for shorts to
d. Check the continuity of all wires from the transmitter to the sensor.
2. Check the core processor LED.
3. If no definite correctable cause was found, replace the core processor.
a. If the problem persists, put back the original core processor and replace the transmitter.
b. If the problem still persists, replace both the transmitter and core processor.
1. Check the HART device ID.
2. The transmitter has a weights and measures security feature that is currently set to “unsecure.” Set the transmitter to “secure” to clear the alarm. An authorized procedure may be required to resecure the transmitter.
There has been a failure in the transmitter electronics. Try cycling power to the meter to see if the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, replace the core processor.
This can be an indication that there has been a loss of communication between the transmitter and the display module. Try cycling power to the meter to see if the alarm clears. If possible, replace the display module.
The firmware or configuration loaded in the transmitter is incompatible with the board type. If this alarm occurred in conjunction with an effort to load a configuration into the transmitter, confirm that the transmitter is of the same model as the one the configuration came from.
Try cycling power to the meter to see if the alarm clears. If the problem persists, contact Micro Motion for additional assistance.
Configuration and Use Manual
175
Troubleshooting
Table 10-2: Status alarms and recommended actions
(continued)
Alarm code
A031
A032
A033
A035
Description
Low Power
Meter Verification in Progress:
Outputs to Fault
Insufficient Right/Left Pickoff
Signal
Meter Verification Aborted
Recommended actions
The core processor on the sensor is not receiving sufficient power. Check the wiring between the transmitter and the sensor.
Power to the transmitter must be cycled to clear this alarm.
1. Using the installation manual for your transmitter, verify that the transmitter is connected to the sensor according to the instructions. Obey all safety messages when opening wiring compartments.
2. Verify that the wires are making good contact with the terminals.
3. Check the continuity of all wires from the transmitter to the sensor.
4. Cycle power to the meter, then retry the procedure.
5. Measure the voltage at the core processor terminals. There should be a minimum of 11.5 volts at all times.
a. If there is less than 11.5 volts, confirm that the transmitter is receiving sufficient voltage. (You may need to refer to the installation manual.) b. If the transmitter is receiving sufficient voltage, and the problem still persists, replace the transmitter.
Meter verification in progress, with outputs set to Fault or Last
Measured Value
.
There is insufficient signal coming from the sensor pickoff coils, which suggests that the sensor tubes are being prevented from vibrating at their natural frequency. This alarm often appears in conjunction with alarm A102.
1. Check for possible fluid separation by monitoring the density value and comparing the results against expected density values.
2. Check for plugging, coating, or slug flow.
3. Settling from a two-phase or three-phase fluid can cause this alarm even if the flow tubes are full. This could mean that the sensor needs to be reoriented. Refer to the sensor installation manual for recommended sensor orientations.
The Meter Verification test did not complete, possibly because it was manually aborted.
1. Verify that process conditions are stable, then retry the test.
2. Contact Micro Motion.
176
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
Table 10-2: Status alarms and recommended actions
(continued)
Alarm code
A100
A101
A102
A103
A104
A105
A106
A107
A108
A109
Description
mA Output 1 Saturated mA Output 1 Fixed
Drive Overrange
Data Loss Possible (Totals and
Inventories)
Calibration in Progress
Slug Flow
Burst Mode Enabled
Power Reset Occurred
Basic Event 1 On
Basic Event 2 On
Recommended actions
The calculated mA output value is outside of the meter's configured range.
1. Check the Upper Range Value and Lower Range Value parameters. Are they set correctly?
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the flowmeter.
3. Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
4. Purge the flow tubes.
5. Verify process conditions, checking especially for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in the tubes, or coating in the tubes.
Non-zero HART address configured, or the mA output is configured to send a constant value.
1. Check whether the output is in loop test mode. If it is, unfix the output.
2. Exit mA output trim, if applicable.
3. Check the HART polling address.
4. Check whether the output has been set to a constant value via digital communication.
The drive power (current/voltage) is at its maximum.
1. Check the drive gain and pickoff voltage.
2. Check for electrical shorts between sensor terminals or between the sensor terminals and the sensor case.
3. Check for partially filled tubes, tube fouling, damaged tubes, and excessive air entrainment or flashing.
4. Settling from a two- or three-phase fluid could create this alarm even if the flow tubes are full, which could mean the sensor needs to be reoriented. Refer to the sensor installation manual for recommended sensor orientations.
The totalizers are not being saved properly. The core processor was unable to store the totalizers on the last power-down and must rely on the saved totals. The saved totals can be as much as two hours out of date.
1. Make sure the transmitter and core processor are receiving sufficient power.
2. Check the power supply and power supply wiring.
A calibration procedure is in process.
The density of the process has exceeded the user-defined density limits. Check for slug flow (two-phase flow).
HART burst mode is enabled.
The transmitter has been restarted.
No action required.
No action required.
Configuration and Use Manual
177
Troubleshooting
Table 10-2: Status alarms and recommended actions
(continued)
Alarm code
A110
A111
A112
A113
A114
A115
A116
Description
Frequency Output Saturated
Frequency Output Fixed
Recommended actions
The calculated frequency output is outside the configured range.
1. Check the Frequency Output Scaling Method parameter.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the flowmeter.
3. Verify process conditions, checking especially for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in the tubes, or coating in the tubes.
4. Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
5. Purge the flow tubes.
The frequency output has been configured to send a constant value.
1. Stopping the totalizer will set the frequency output to zero.
Cycling power to the transmitter or restarting the totalizer will restore the frequency output to normal operation.
2. Check whether the output is in loop test mode. If it is, unfix the output.
3. Check whether the output has been set to a constant value via digital communication.
Upgrade Transmitter Software Contact Micro Motion.
mA Output 2 Saturated 1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the flowmeter.
2. Verify process conditions, checking especially for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in the tubes, or coating in the tubes.
3. Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
4. Purge the flow tubes.
5. Check the Upper Range Value and Lower Range Value parameters. Are they set correctly?
mA Output 2 Fixed 1. Check whether the output is in loop test mode. If it is, unfix the output.
2. Exit mA output trim, if applicable.
3. Check whether the output has been set to a constant value via digital communication.
No External Input or Polled Data
Temperature Overrange (Petroleum)
The HART polling connection to an external device has failed. No response received from polled device.
1. Verify the external device operation.
2. Verify the wiring between the transmitter and the external device.
3. Verify the HART polling configuration.
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the flowmeter.
2. Verify the configuration of the petroleum measurement table type and temperature.
178
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
Table 10-2: Status alarms and recommended actions
(continued)
Alarm code
A117
A118
A120
A121
A131
A132
A133
A141
Description
Density Overrange (Petroleum)
Discrete Output 1 Fixed
Curve Fit Failure (Concentration)
Extrapolation Alarm (Concentration)
Meter Verification in Progress:
Outputs to Last Measured Value
Sensor Simulation Active
EEPROM Error (Display)
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the flowmeter.
2. Verify the configuration of the petroleum measurement table type and density.
The discrete output has been configured to send a constant value.
Verify the configuration of the concentration measurement application.
If the product in the sensor has temperature or density properties that are outside the parameters established by the concentration measurement curve, this is a symptom and no action is required. This alarm should clear when the process fluid returns to normal.
If the problem persists, check the configuration of the concentration measurement application.
Meter verification in progress, with outputs set to Last Measured
Value
.
Simulation mode is enabled.
Change the display module. If the problem persists, contact
Micro Motion.
No action required.
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
DDC trigger(s) have completed
Density FD Calibration in Progress
Density D1 Calibration in Progress
Density D2 Calibration in Progress
Density D3 Calibration in Progress
Density D4 Calibration in Progress
Zero Calibration in Progress
Reverse Flow
No action required.
No action required.
No action required.
No action required.
No action required.
No action required.
No action required.
Configuration and Use Manual
179
Troubleshooting
10.3
Flow measurement problems
Table 10-3: Flow measurement problems and recommended actions
Problem
Flow indication at no flow conditions or zero offset
Erratic non-zero flow rate under no-flow conditions
Possible causes
• Misaligned piping (especially in new installations)
• Open or leaking valve
• Incorrect sensor zero
• Leaking valve or seal
• Slug flow
• Plugged or coated flow tube
• Incorrect sensor orientation
• Wiring problem
• Vibration in pipeline at rate close to sensor tube frequency
• Damping value too low
• Mounting stress on sensor
Recommended actions
• Verify that all of the characterization parameters match the data on the sensor tag.
• If the flow reading is not excessively high, review the live zero. You may need to restore the factory zero.
• Check for open or leaking valves or seals.
• Check for mounting stress on the sensor
(e.g., sensor being used to support piping, misaligned piping).
• Contact Micro Motion.
• Verify that the sensor orientation is appropriate for your application (refer to the sensor installation manual).
• Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
See
• If the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter includes a 9-wire segment, verify that the 9-wire cable shields are correctly grounded.
• Check the wiring between the sensor and transmitter. See
.
• For sensors with a junction box, check for moisture in the junction box.
• Purge the flow tubes.
• Check for open or leaking valves or seals.
• Check for sources of vibration.
• Verify damping configuration.
• Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
•
• Check for radio frequency interference. See
.
• Contact Micro Motion.
180
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
Table 10-3: Flow measurement problems and recommended actions
(continued)
Problem
Erratic non-zero flow rate when flow is steady
Inaccurate flow rate or batch total
Possible causes
• Slug flow
• Damping value too low
• Plugged or coated flow tube
• Output wiring problem
• Problem with receiving device
• Wiring problem
• Wiring problem
• Inappropriate measurement unit
• Incorrect flow calibration factor
• Incorrect meter factor
• Incorrect density calibration factors
• Incorrect flowmeter grounding
• Slug flow
• Problem with receiving device
Recommended actions
• Verify that the sensor orientation is appropriate for your application (refer to the sensor installation manual).
• Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
See
• If the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter includes a 9-wire segment, verify that the 9-wire cable shields are correctly grounded.
• Check for air entrainment, tube fouling, flashing, or tube damage.
• Check the wiring between the sensor and transmitter. See
.
• For sensors with a junction box, check for moisture in the junction box.
• Purge the flow tubes.
• Check for open or leaking valves or seals.
• Check for sources of vibration.
• Verify damping configuration.
• Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
•
• Check for radio frequency interference. See
.
• Contact Micro Motion.
• Check the wiring between the sensor and transmitter. See
.
• Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
• Verify that all of the characterization parameters match the data on the sensor tag.
• Perform a bucket test to verify batch totals.
• Zero the meter.
•
•
• Verify that the receiving device, and the wiring between the transmitter and the receiving device.
• Check sensor coil resistance and for shorts to case. See
• Replace the core processor or transmitter.
Configuration and Use Manual
181
Troubleshooting
10.4
Density measurement problems
Table 10-4: Density measurement problems and recommended actions
Problem
Inaccurate density reading
Unusually high density reading
Unusually low density reading
Possible causes
• Problem with process fluid
• Incorrect density calibration factors
• Wiring problem
• Incorrect flowmeter grounding
• Slug flow
• Plugged or coated flow tube
• Incorrect sensor orientation
• RTD failure
• Physical characteristics of sensor have changed
• Plugged or coated flow tube
• Incorrect K2 value
• Incorrect temperature measurement
• RTD problem
• In high frequency meters, this can be an indication of erosion or corrosion
• In low frequency meters this can indicate tube fouling
• Slug flow
• Incorrect K2 value
• In low frequency meters this can indicate erosion or corrosion
Recommended actions
• Check the wiring between the sensor and transmitter. See
.
•
• Check your process conditions against the values reported by the flowmeter.
• Verify that all of the characterization parameters match the data on the sensor tag.
•
• If two sensors with similar frequency are too near each other, separate them.
• Purge the flow tubes.
• Verify that all of the characterization parameters match the data on the sensor tag.
• Purge the flow tubes.
• Check for coating in the flow tubes.
• Check your process conditions against the values reported by the flowmeter.
• Verify that all of the characterization parameters match the data on the sensor tag.
• Check the wiring between the sensor and transmitter. See
.
• Check for tube erosion, especially if the process fluid is abrasive.
182
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
10.5
Temperature measurement problems
Table 10-5: Temperature measurement problems and recommended actions
Problem
Temperature reading significantly different from process temperature
Temperature reading slightly different from process temperature
Possible causes
• RTD failure
• Wiring problem
• Sensor temperature not yet equalized
• Sensor leaking heat
Recommended actions
• Check junction box for moisture or verdigris.
• Perform RTD resistance checks and check
).
• Confirm the temperature calibration factor matches the value on the sensor tag.
• Refer to status alarms (especially RTD failure alarms).
• Disable external temperature compensation.
• Verify temperature calibration.
• Check the wiring between the sensor and transmitter. See
.
• The RTD has a specification of ±1 °C. If the error is within this range there is no problem. If the temperature measurement is outside the specification for the sensor, contact Micro Motion.
• The temperature of the fluid may be changing rapidly. Allow sufficient time for the sensor to equalize with the process fluid.
• Insulate the sensor if necessary.
• Perform RTD resistance checks and check
).
• The RTD may not be making good contact with the sensor. The sensor may need to be replaced.
Configuration and Use Manual
183
Troubleshooting
10.6
Milliamp output problems
Table 10-6: Milliamp output problems and recommended actions
Problem
No mA output
Loop test failed mA output below 4 mA
Constant mA output
Possible causes
• Wiring problem
• Circuit failure
• Channel not configured for desired output
• Power supply problem
• Wiring problem
• Circuit failure
• Channel not configured for desired output
• Incorrect internal/external power configuration
• Open in wiring
• Bad output circuit
• Process condition below LRV
• LRV and URV are not set correctly
• Fault condition if fault action is set to internal zero or downscale
• Bad mA receiving device
•
•
•
•
•
Incorrect process variable assigned to the output
Fault condition exists
Non-zero HART address (mA output 1)
Output is configured for loop test mode
Zero calibration failure
Recommended actions
• Check the power supply and power supply
.
• Check the mA output wiring.
• Check the Fault Action settings. See
.
• Measure DC voltage across output terminals to verify that the output is active.
• Contact Micro Motion.
• Check the power supply and power supply
.
• Check the mA output wiring.
• Check the Fault Action settings. See
.
• Contact Micro Motion.
• Check your process conditions against the values reported by the flowmeter.
• Verify that the receiving device, and the wiring between the transmitter and the receiving device.
• Check the settings of Upper Range Value and
Lower Range Value
• Check the Fault Action settings. See
.
• Verify the output variable assignments.
• View and resolve any existing alarm conditions.
• Check the HART address and Loop Current
Mode . See
.
• Check to see if a loop test is in process (the output is fixed).
• Check HART burst mode configuration.
See
• If related to a zero calibration failure, cycle power to the meter and retry the zeroing procedure.
184
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
Table 10-6: Milliamp output problems and recommended actions
(continued)
Problem
mA output consistently out of range
Consistently incorrect mA measurement mA output correct at lower current, but incorrect at higher current
Possible causes
• Incorrect process variable or units assigned to output
• Fault condition if fault action is set to upscale or downscale
• LRV and URV are not set correctly
•
•
•
•
•
•
Loop problem
Output not trimmed correctly
Incorrect flow measurement unit configured
Incorrect process variable configured
LRV and URV are not set correctly mA loop resistance may be set too high
Recommended actions
• Verify the output variable assignments.
• Verify the measurement units configured for the output.
• Check the Fault Action settings. See
.
• Check the settings of Upper Range Value and
Lower Range Value
• Check the mA output trim. See
.
• Check the mA output trim. See
.
• Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
• Verify the process variable assigned to the mA output.
• Check the settings of Upper Range Value and
Lower Range Value
• Verify that the mA output load resistance is below maximum supported load (see the installation manual for your transmitter).
10.7
Frequency output problems
Configuration and Use Manual
185
Troubleshooting
Table 10-7: Frequency output problems and recommended actions
Problem
Consistently incorrect frequency measurement
Erratic frequency output
Possible causes
No frequency output • Stopped totalizer
• Process condition below cutoff
• Fault condition if fault action is set to internal zero or downscale
• Slug flow
• Flow in reverse direction from configured flow direction parameter
• Bad frequency receiving device
• Output level not compatible with receiving device
• Bad output circuit
• Incorrect internal/external power configuration
• Incorrect pulse width configuration
• Output not powered
• Wiring problem
• Output not scaled correctly
• Incorrect flow measurement unit configured
• Radio frequency interference (RFI) from environment
Recommended actions
• Verify that the process conditions are below the low-flow cutoff. Reconfigure the low-flow cutoff if necessary.
• Check the Fault Action settings. See
.
• Verify that the totalizers are not stopped. A stopped totalizer will cause the frequency output to be locked.
•
•
• Verify that the receiving device, and the wiring between the transmitter and the receiving device.
• Verify that the channel is wired and configured as a frequency output.
• Verify the power configuration for the frequency output (internal vs. external).
•
•
• Check the frequency output scaling. See
.
• Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
• Check for radio frequency interference. See
.
10.8
186
Use sensor simulation for troubleshooting
When sensor simulation is enabled, the transmitter reports user-specified values for mass flow, temperature, and density. This allows you to reproduce various process conditions or to test the system.
You can use sensor simulation to help distinguish between legitimate process noise and externally caused variation. For example, consider a receiving device that reports an unexpectedly erratic flow value. If sensor simulation is enabled and the observed flow rate does not match the simulated value, the source of the problem is likely to be somewhere between the transmitter and the receiving device.
Important
When sensor simulation is active, the simulated value is used in all transmitter outputs and calculations, including totals and inventories, volume flow calculations, and concentration calculations. Disable all automatic functions related to the transmitter outputs and place the loop in manual operation. Do not enable simulation mode unless your application can tolerate these effects, and be sure to disable simulation mode when you have finished testing.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
10.9
For more information on using sensor simulation using ProLink II, see
.
Check power supply wiring
If the power supply wiring is damaged or improperly connected, the transmitter may not receive enough power to operate properly.
Prerequisites
You will need the installation manual for your transmitter.
Procedure
1.
Before inspecting the power supply wiring, disconnect the power source.
CAUTION!
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes after disconnecting the power.
2.
Verify that the correct external fuse is used.
An incorrect fuse can limit current to the transmitter and keep it from initializing.
3.
Ensure that the power supply wires are connected to the correct terminals.
4.
Verify that the power supply wires are making good contact, and are not clamped to the wire insulation.
5.
Inspect the voltage label on the inside of the field-wiring compartment.
The voltage supplied to the transmitter should match the voltage specified on the label.
6.
Reapply power to the transmitter.
CAUTION!
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not reapply power to the transmitter with the housing cover removed. Reapplying power to the transmitter while the housing cover is removed could cause an explosion.
7.
Use a voltmeter to test the voltage at the transmitter’s power supply terminals.
The voltage should be within specified limits. For DC power, you may need to size the cable.
10.10
Check sensor-to-transmitter wiring
A number of power-supply and output problems may occur if the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter is improperly connected, or if the wiring becomes damaged.
Configuration and Use Manual
187
Troubleshooting
Prerequisites
You will need the installation manual for your transmitter.
Procedure
1.
Before opening the wiring compartments, disconnect the power source.
CAUTION!
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes after disconnecting the power.
2.
Verify that the transmitter is connected to the sensor according to the information provided in your transmitter installation manual.
3.
Verify that the wires are making good contact with the terminals.
4.
Check the continuity of all wires from the transmitter to the sensor.
10.11
Check grounding
The sensor and the transmitter must be grounded. If the core processor is installed as part of the transmitter or the sensor, it is grounded automatically. If the core processor is installed separately, it must be grounded separately.
Prerequisites
You will need:
• Installation manual for your sensor
• Installation manual for your transmitter
Procedure
Refer to the sensor and transmitter installation manuals for grounding requirements and instructions.
10.12
Perform loop tests
A loop test is a way to verify that the transmitter and the remote device are communicating properly. A loop test also helps you know whether you need to trim mA outputs.
10.12.1
Perform loop tests using the display
Prerequisites
Before performing a loop test, configure the channels for the transmitter inputs and outputs that will be used in your application.
188
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
Procedure
1.
Test the mA output(s).
a. Choose and select a low value, e.g., 4 mA.
Dots traverse the display while the output is fixed.
b. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
c. At the transmitter, activate Select.
d. Scroll to and select a high value, e.g., 20 mA.
Dots traverse the display while the output is fixed.
e. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
f. At the transmitter, activate Select.
2.
Test the frequency output(s).
a. Choose OFFLINE MAINT > SIM > FO SIM, and select the frequency output value.
The frequency output can be set to 1, 10, or 15 kHz.
Note
If the Weights & Measures application is enabled on the transmitter, it is not possible to perform a loop test of the frequency output, even when the transmitter is unsecured.
Dots traverse the display while the output is fixed.
b. Read the frequency signal at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
c. At the transmitter, activate Select.
3.
Test the discrete output(s).
a. Choose OFFLINE MAINT > SIM > DO SIM, and select SET ON.
Dots traverse the display while the output is fixed.
b. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
Configuration and Use Manual
189
Troubleshooting c. At the transmitter, activate Select.
d. Scroll to and select SET OFF.
e. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
f. At the transmitter, activate Select.
Postrequisites
• If the mA output reading was slightly off at the receiving device, you can correct this discrepancy by trimming the output.
• If the mA output reading was significantly off (±200 microamps), or if at any step the reading was faulty, verify the wiring between the transmitter and the remote device, and try again.
• If the discrete output reading is reversed, check the setting of Discrete Output Polarity.
10.12.2
Perform loop tests using ProLink II
Prerequisites
Before performing a loop test, configure the channels for the transmitter inputs and outputs that will be used in your application.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
ProLink II must be running and must be connected to the transmitter.
Procedure
1.
Test the mA output(s).
a. Choose ProLink > Test > Fix Milliamp 1 or ProLink > Test > Fix Milliamp 2.
b. Enter 4 mA in Set Output To.
c. Click Fix mA.
d. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
e. Click UnFix mA.
f. Enter 20 mA in Set Output To.
g. Click Fix mA.
h. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
190
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting i. Click UnFix mA.
2.
Test the frequency output(s).
a. Choose ProLink > Test > Fix Freq Out.
b. Enter the frequency output value in Set Output To.
c. Click Fix Frequency.
d. Read the frequency signal at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
e. Click UnFix Freq.
3.
Test the discrete output(s).
a. Choose ProLink > Test > Fix Discrete Output.
b. Select On.
c. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
d. Select Off.
e. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
f. Click UnFix.
Postrequisites
• If the mA output reading was slightly off at the receiving device, you can correct this discrepancy by trimming the output.
• If the mA output reading was significantly off (±200 microamps), or if at any step the reading was faulty, verify the wiring between the transmitter and the remote device, and try again.
• If the discrete output reading is reversed, check the setting of Discrete Output Polarity.
10.12.3
Perform loop tests using ProLink III
Prerequisites
Before performing a loop test, configure the channels for the transmitter inputs and outputs that will be used in your application.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
ProLink II must be running and must be connected to the transmitter.
Procedure
1.
Test the mA output(s).
a. Choose Device Tools > Diagnostics > Testing > mA Output 1 Test or Device Tools >
Diagnostics
> Testing > mA Output 2 Test.
b. Enter 4 in Fix to:.
Configuration and Use Manual
191
Troubleshooting c. Click Fix mA.
d. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
e. Click UnFix mA.
f. Enter 20 in Fix to:.
g. Click Fix mA.
h. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
i. Click UnFix mA.
2.
Test the frequency output(s).
a. Choose Device Tools > Diagnostics > Testing > Frequency Output Test.
b. Enter the frequency output value in Fix to.
c. Click Fix FO.
d. Read the frequency signal at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
e. Click UnFix FO.
3.
Test the discrete output(s).
a. Choose Device Tools > Diagnostics > Testing > Discrete Output Test.
b. Set Fix To: to ON.
c. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
d. Set Fix To: to OFF.
e. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
f. Click UnFix.
10.12.4
Perform loop tests using the Field Communicator
Tip
Loop tests are not required. However, Micro Motion recommends performing a loop test for every input or output available on your transmitter. The inputs and outputs available on your transmitter vary according to your purchase option and your channel configuration. You may not need to perform all of the loop tests described here.
192
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
Prerequisites
Before performing a loop test, configure the channels for the transmitter inputs and outputs that will be used in your application.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that loop testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control loops.
Procedure
1.
Test the mA output(s).
a. Choose Service Tools > Simulate > Simulate Outputs > mA Output Loop Test and select 4 mA .
b. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
c. Press OK.
d. Select 20 mA.
e. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the discrepancy by trimming the output.
f. Press OK.
g. Choose End.
2.
Test the frequency output(s).
Note
If the Weights & Measures application is enabled on the transmitter, it is not possible to perform a loop test of the frequency output, even when the transmitter is unsecured.
a. Press Service Tools > Simulate > Simulate Outputs > Frequency Output Test, and choose the frequency output level.
b. Read the frequency signal at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
c. Choose End.
3.
Test the discrete output(s).
a. Press Service Tools > Simulate > Simulate Outputs > Discrete Output Test.
b. Choose Off.
c. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
d. Press OK.
Configuration and Use Manual
193
Troubleshooting e. Choose On.
f. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
g. Press OK.
h. Choose End.
Postrequisites
• If the mA output reading was slightly off at the receiving device, you can correct this discrepancy by trimming the output.
• If the mA output reading was significantly off (±200 microamps), or if at any step the reading was faulty, verify the wiring between the transmitter and the remote device, and try again.
• If the discrete output reading is reversed, check the setting of Discrete Output Polarity.
10.13
Check for radio frequency interference (RFI)
The transmitter's frequency output or discrete output can be affected by radio frequency interference (RFI). Possible sources of RFI include a source of radio emissions, or a large transformer, pump, or motor that can generate a strong electromagnetic field. Several methods to reduce RFI are available. Use one or more of the following suggestions, as appropriate to your installation.
Procedure
• Eliminate the RFI source.
• Move the transmitter.
• Use shielded cable for the frequency output or discrete output.
Terminate the shielding at the output device. If this is impossible, terminate the shielding at the cable gland or conduit fitting.
Do not terminate the shielding inside the wiring compartment.
360-degree termination of shielding is unnecessary.
10.14
Check the HART communication loop
If you cannot establish or maintain HART communications, the HART loop may be wired incorrectly.
Prerequisites
You will need:
• A copy of your transmitter installation manual
• A Field Communicator
• Optional: the HART Application Guide, available at www.hartcomm.org
194
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
Procedure
1.
Verify that the loop wires are connected as shown in the wiring diagrams in the transmitter installation manual.
If your HART network is more complex than the wiring diagrams in the transmitter installation manual, contact either Micro Motion or the HART Communication
Foundation.
2.
Disconnect the primary mA output wiring from the transmitter.
3.
Install a 250–1000 Ω resistor across the transmitter’s primary mA output terminals.
4.
Check the voltage drop across the resistor (4–20 mA = 1–5 VDC).
If voltage drop is less than 1 VDC, add resistance to achieve a voltage drop of greater than 1 VDC.
5.
Connect a Field Communicator directly across the resistor and attempt to communicate (poll).
If communication with the transmitter cannot be established, the transmitter may need service. Contact Micro Motion.
10.15
Check HART Address and Loop Current Mode
If the transmitter is producing a fixed current from the mA output, the Loop Current Mode parameter may be disabled.
When Loop Current Mode is disabled, the mA output produces a fixed value, and does not report process data or implement its fault action.
When HART Address is changed, some configuration tools will automatically change Loop
Current Mode .
Tip
Always verify Loop Current Mode after setting or changing HART Address.
Procedure
1.
Set HART Address as appropriate for your HART network.
The default address is 0. This is the recommended value unless the transmitter is in a multidrop network.
2.
Set Loop Current Mode to Enabled.
Configuration and Use Manual
195
Troubleshooting
10.16
Check HART burst mode
HART burst mode can cause the transmitter to output unexpected values. Burst mode is normally disabled, and should only be enabled if another device on the HART network requires burst mode communication.
1.
Check to see if burst mode is enabled or disabled.
2.
If burst mode is enabled, disable it.
10.17
Check the trimming of the mA output
If the trim values for the mA output are inaccurate, the transmitter will under-compensate or over-compensate the output.
1.
Trim the output, following the standard procedure.
2.
If this does not correct the problem, contact Micro Motion.
10.18
Check Lower Range Value and Upper Range
Value
If the process conditions fall below the configured Lower Range Value (LRV) or rise above the configured Upper Range Value (URV), the transmitter outputs may send unexpected values.
1.
Make a note of your current process conditions.
2.
Check the configuration of the LRV and URV.
10.19
Check mA Output Fault Action
mA Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the mA output if the transmitter encounters an internal fault condition. If the mA output is reporting a constant value below 4 mA or above 20 mA, the transmitter may be in a fault condition.
1.
Check the status alarms for active fault conditons.
2.
If there are active fault conditions, the transmitter is performing correctly. If you want to change its behavior, consider the following options:
• Change the setting of mA Output Fault Action.
• For the relevant status alarms, change the setting of Alarm Severity to Ignore.
3.
If there are no active fault conditions, continue troubleshooting.
196
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
10.20
Check Frequency Output Maximum Pulse
Width
If Frequency Output Maximum Pulse Width is set incorrectly, the frequency output may report an incorrect value.
Verify the configuration of Frequency Output Maximum Pulse Width.
For most applications, the default value for Frequency Output Maximum Pulse Width is appropriate. This corresponds to a 50% duty cycle.
10.21
Check Frequency Output Scaling Method
If Frequency Output Scaling Method is set incorrectly, the frequency output may report an incorrect value.
1.
Verify the configuration of Frequency Output Scaling Method.
2.
If you changed the setting of Frequency Output Scaling Method, check the settings of all other frequency output parameters.
10.22
Check Frequency Output Fault Action
The Frequency Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the frequency output if the transmitter encounters an internal fault condition. If the frequency output is reporting a constant value, the transmitter may be in a fault condition.
1.
Check the status alarms for active fault conditons.
2.
If there are active fault conditions, the transmitter is performing correctly. If you want to change its behavior, consider the following options:
• Change the setting of Frequency Output Fault Action.
• For the relevant status alarms, change the setting of Alarm Severity to Ignore.
3.
If there are no active fault conditions, continue troubleshooting.
10.23
Check Flow Direction
If Flow Direction is set inappropriately for your process, the transmitter may report unexpected flow values or totals.
The Flow Direction parameter interacts with actual flow direction to affect flow values, flow totals and inventories, and output behavior. For the simplest operation, actual process flow should match the flow arrow that is on the side of the sensor case.
Procedure
1.
Verify the actual direction of process flow through the sensor.
Configuration and Use Manual
197
Troubleshooting
2.
Verify the configuration of Flow Direction.
10.24
Check the cutoffs
If the transmitter cutoffs are configured incorrectly, the transmitter may report zero flow when flow is present, or very small amounts of flow under no-flow conditions.
There are separate cutoff parameters for mass flow rate, volume flow rate, gas standard volume flow rate (if applicable), and density. There is an independent cutoff for each mA output on your transmitter. The interaction between cutoffs sometimes produces unexpected results.
Procedure
Verify the configuration of the cutoffs.
Tip
For typical applications, Micro Motion recommends setting Mass Flow Cutoff to the zero stability value for your sensor, multiplied by 10. Zero stabiliy values can be found in the Product Data Sheet for your sensor.
10.25
Check for slug flow (two-phase flow)
Slug flow (two-phase flow, entrained gas) can cause spikes in the drive gain. This may cause the transmitter to report zero flow, or to post several different alarms.
1.
Check for slug flow alarms.
If the transmitter is not generating slug flow alarms, slug flow is not the source of your problem.
2.
Check the process for cavitation, flashing, or leaks.
3.
Monitor the density of your process fluid output under normal process conditions.
4.
Check the settings of Slug Low Limit, Slug High Limit, and Slug Duration.
Tip
You can reduce the occurrence of slug flow alarms by setting Slug Low Limit to a lower value,
Slug High Limit to a higher value, or Slug Duration to a higher value.
10.26
Check the drive gain
Excessive or erratic drive gain may indicate any of a variety of process conditions, sensor problems, or configuration problems.
198
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
To know whether your drive gain is excessive or erratic, you must collect drive gain data during the problem condition and compare it to drive gain data from a period of normal operation.
Excessive (saturated) drive gain
Table 10-8: Possible causes and recommended actions for excessive (saturated) drive gain
Possible cause
Slug flow
Partially filled flow tube
Plugged flow tube
Recommended actions
Correct process conditions so that the flow tubes are full.
Check the pickoff voltages (see
). If either of them are close to zero (but neither is zero), plugged tubes may be the source of your problem. Purge the tubes. In extreme cases, you may need to replace the sensor.
Cavitation, flashing, or air entrainment; settling of two- or three-phase fluids
• Increase the inlet or back pressure at the sensor.
• If a pump is located upstream from the sensor, increase the distance between the pump and sensor.
• The sensor may need to be reorientated. Consult the installation manual for your sensor for recommended orientations.
Drive board or module failure Contact Micro Motion.
Bent flow tube Check the pickoff voltages (see close to zero (but neither is zero), the flow tubes may be bent. The sensor will need to be replaced.
). If either of them are
Cracked flow tube
Sensor imbalance
Replace the sensor.
Contact Micro Motion.
Mechanical binding at sensor Ensure sensor is free to vibrate.
Contact Micro Motion.
Open drive or left pickoff sensor coil
Flow rate out of range
Incorrect sensor characterization
Ensure that flow rate is within sensor limits.
Verify the characterization parameters.
Erratic drive gain
Table 10-9: Possible causes and recommended actions for erratic drive gain
Possible cause
Wrong K1 characterization constant for sensor
Recommended actions
Verify the K1 characterization parameter.
Polarity of pick-off reversed or polarity of drive reversed Contact Micro Motion.
Slug flow
Foreign material caught in flow tubes
Check for slug flow. See
• Purge the flow tubes.
• Replace the sensor.
Configuration and Use Manual
199
Troubleshooting
10.26.1
Collect drive gain data
Drive gain data can be used to diagnose a variety of process and equipment conditions.
Collect drive gain data from a period of normal operation, and use this data as a baseline for troubleshooting.
Procedure
1.
Navigate to the drive gain data.
2.
Observe and record drive gain data over an appropriate period of time, under a variety of process conditions.
10.27
Check the pickoff voltage
If the pickoff voltage readings are unusually low, you may have any of a variety of process or equipment problems.
To know whether your pickoff voltage is unusually low, you must collect pickoff voltage data during the problem condition and compare it to pickoff voltage data from a period of normal operation.
Table 10-10: Possible causes and recommended actions for low pickoff voltage
Possible cause
Air entrainment
Recommended actions
• Increase the inlet or back pressure at the sensor.
• If a pump is located upstream from the sensor, increase the distance between the pump and sensor.
• The sensor may need to be reoriented. Consult the installation manual for your sensor for recommended orientations.
Verify wiring between sensor and transmitter.
Faulty wiring runs between the sensor and transmitter
Process flow rate beyond the limits of the sensor
Slug flow
No tube vibration in sensor
Verify that the process flow rate is not out of range of the sensor.
• Check for plugging.
• Ensure sensor is free to vibrate (no mechanical binding).
• Verify wiring.
• Test coils at sensor. See
Eliminate the moisture in the sensor electronics.
Moisture in the sensor electronics
The sensor is damaged, or sensor magnets may have become demagnetized
Replace the sensor.
200
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
10.27.1
Collect pickoff voltage data
Pickoff voltage data can be used to diagnose a variety of process and equipment conditions. Collect pickoff voltage data from a period of normal operation, and use this data as a baseline for troubleshooting.
Procedure
1.
Navigate to the pickoff voltage data.
2.
Observe and record data for both the left pickoff and the right pickoff, over an appropriate period of time, under a variety of process conditions.
10.28
Check for electrical shorts
Shorts between sensor terminals or between the sensor terminals and the sensor case can cause the sensor to stop working.
Table 10-11: Possible causes and recommended actions for electrical shorts
Possible cause
Moisture inside the junction box
Recommended action
Ensure that the junction box is dry and no corrosion is present.
Contact Micro Motion.
Liquid or moisture inside the sensor case
Internally shorted feedthrough
Faulty cable
Improper wire termination
Contact Micro Motion.
Replace the cable.
Verify wire terminations inside sensor junction box. The
Micro Motion document titled 9-Wire Flowmeter Cable Prepa-
ration and Installation Guide may offer some assistance.
10.28.1
Check the sensor coils
Checking the sensor coils can identify electrical shorts.
Restriction
This procedure applies only to 9-wire remote-mount transmitters and remote transmitters with remote core processors..
Procedure
1.
Disconnect power to the transmitter.
CAUTION!
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait 5 minutes before continuing.
Configuration and Use Manual
201
Troubleshooting
202
2.
Remove the end-cap from the core processor housing.
3.
Unplug the terminal blocks from the terminal board on the core processor.
4.
Using a digital multimeter (DMM), check the pickoff coils by placing the DMM leads on the unplugged terminal blocks for each terminal pair. See
the coils. Record the values.
Table 10-12: Coils and test terminal pairs
Coil
Drive coil
Left pickoff coil (LPO)
Right pickoff coil (RPO)
Sensor model
All
All
All
Resistance temperature detector (RTD) All
Lead length compensator (LLC) All except T-Series and CMF400
(see note)
Composite RTD T-Series
Fixed resistor (see note) CMF400
Terminal colors
Brown to red
Green to white
Blue to gray
Yellow to violet
Yellow to orange
Yellow to orange
Yellow to orange
Note
The CMF400 fixed resistor applies only to certain specific CMF400 releases. Contact Micro
Motion for more information.
There should be no open circuits, that is, no infinite resistance readings. The left pickoff and right pickoff readings should be the same or very close ( ±5
Ω). If there are any unusual readings, repeat the coil resistance tests at the sensor junction box to eliminate the possibility of faulty cable. The readings for each coil pair should match at both ends.
5.
Test the terminals in the sensor junction box for shorts to case.
a. Leave the terminal blocks disconnected.
b. Remove the lid of the junction box.
c. Testing one terminal at a time, place a DMM lead on the terminal and the other lead on the sensor case.
With the DMM set to its highest range, there should be infinite resistance on each lead. If there is any resistance at all, there is a short to case.
6.
Test the resistance of junction box terminal pairs.
a. Test the brown terminal against all other terminals except the red one.
b. Test the red terminal against all other terminals except the brown one.
c. Test the green terminal against all other terminals except the white one.
d. Test the white terminal against all other terminals except the green one.
e. Test the blue terminal against all other terminals except the gray one.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting f. Test the gray terminal against all other terminals except the blue one.
g. Test the orange terminal against all other terminals except the yellow and violet ones.
h. Test the yellow terminal against all other terminals except the orange and violet ones.
i. Test the violet terminal against all other terminals except the yellow and orange ones.
There should be infinite resistance for each pair. If there is any resistance at all, there is a short between terminals.
Postrequisites
To return to normal operation:
1.
Plug the terminal blocks into the terminal board.
2.
Replace the end-cap on the core processor housing.
3.
Replace the lid on the sensor junction box.
Important
When reassembling the meter components, be sure to grease all O-rings.
10.29
Check the core processor LED
The core processor has an LED that indicates different meter conditions.
1.
Maintain power to the transmitter.
2.
If you have a 4-wire remote installation or a remote core processor with remote transmitter installation: a. Remove the core processor lid. The core processor is intrinsically safe and can be opened in all environments.
b. Check the state of the core processor LED.
3.
If you have an integral installation: a. Loosen the four cap screws that fasten the transmitter to the base.
Configuration and Use Manual
203
Troubleshooting
Figure 10-1: Integral installation components
Transition ring
4 x cap screws (4 mm)
Base
Transmitter
Core processor b. Rotate the transmitter counter-clockwise so that the cap screws are in the unlocked position.
c. Gently lift the transmitter straight up, disengaging it from the cap screws.
Important
Do not disconnect or damage the wires that connect the transmitter to the core processor.
d. Check the state of the core processor LED.
4.
If you have a 9-wire remote installation: a. Remove the end-cap.
Figure 10-2: 9-wire remote installation components
Transmitter
Core processor
4 x cap screws (4 mm)
End-cap
204
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting b. Inside the core processor housing, loosen the three screws that hold the core processor mounting plate in place.
Do not remove the screws.
c. Rotate the mounting plate so that the screws are in the unlocked position.
d. Holding the tab on the mounting plate, slowly lower the mounting plate so that the top of the core processor is visible.
Important
Do not disconnect or damage the wires that connect the transmitter to the core processor.
e. Check the state of the core processor LED.
Postrequisites
To return to normal operation:
• For a 4-wire remote installation or a remote core processor with remote transmitter installation, replace the core processor lid.
• For an integral installation:
1. Without pinching or stretching the wires, lower the transmitter onto the base, inserting the cap screws into the slots.
•
2. Rotate the transmitter clockwise so that the cap screws are in the locked position.
3. Tighten the cap screws, torquing to 20 to 30 in-lbs (2.3 to 3.4 N-m).
For a 9-wire remote installation:
1. Without pinching or stressing the wires, slide the mounting plate into place.
2. Rotate the mounting plate so that the screws are in the locked position.
3. Tighten the screws, torquing to 6 to 8 in-lbs (0.7 to 0.9 N-m).
4. Replace the end-cap.
Important
When reassembling the meter components, be sure to grease all O-rings.
10.29.1
Core processor LED states
Table 10-13: Standard core processor LED states
LED state
1 flash per second (ON 25%, OFF
75%)
1 flash per second (ON 75%, OFF
25%)
Solid ON
Description
Normal operation
Slug flow (two-phase flow)
Zero or calibration in progress
Recommended actions
No action required.
See
.
No action required.
Configuration and Use Manual
205
Troubleshooting
Table 10-13: Standard core processor LED states
(continued)
LED state
3 rapid flashes, followed by pause
4 flashes per second
OFF
Description
Core processor receiving between 11.5 and 5 volts
Sensor not recognized
Improper configuration
Broken pin between sensor and core processor
Fault condition
Core processor receiving less than 5 volts
Core processor internal failure
Recommended actions
Check power supply to transmitter.
Check wiring between transmitter and sensor.
Check sensor characterization parameters.
The meter requires factory service.
Check alarm status.
• Verify power supply wiring to core processor.
• If transmitter status LED is lit, transmitter is receiving power. Check voltage across terminals
1 (VDC+) and 2 (VDC–) in core processor. If reading is less than 1 VDC, verify power supply wiring to core processor. Wires may be switched.
• If transmitter status LED is not lit, transmitter is not receiving power. Check power supply. If power supply is operational, internal transmitter, display, or LED failure is possible – the meter may require factory service.
The meter requires factory service.
Table 10-14: Enhanced core processor LED states
LED state
Solid green
Flashing yellow
Solid yellow
Solid red
Flashing red (80% on, 20% off)
Description
Normal operation
Zero in progress
Low-severity alarm
High-severity alarm
Tubes not full
Flashing red (50% on, 50% off)
Flashing red (50% on, 50% off, skips every 4th)
Electronics failed
Sensor failed
Recommended action
No action required.
No action required.
Check alarm status.
Check alarm status.
• If alarm A105 (slug flow) is active, refer to the recommended actions for that alarm.
• If alarm A033 (tubes not full) is active, verify process. Check for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in tubes, or coating in tubes.
The meter requires factory service.
The meter requires factory service.
206
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
Table 10-14: Enhanced core processor LED states
(continued)
LED state
OFF
Description
Core processor receiving less than 5 volts
Core processor internal failure
Recommended action
• Verify power supply wiring to core processor.
• If transmitter status LED is lit, transmitter is receiving power. Check voltage across terminals
1 (VDC+) and 2 (VDC–) in core processor. If reading is less than 1 VDC, verify power supply wiring to core processor. Wires may be switched.
• If transmitter status LED is not lit, transmitter is not receiving power. Check power supply. If power supply is operational, internal transmitter, display, or LED failure is possible – the meter may require factory service.
The meter requires factory service.
10.30
Perform a core processor resistance test
1.
Power down the transmitter.
2.
If you have a 4-wire remote installation or a remote core processor with remote transmitter installation, remove the core processor lid.
3.
If you have an integral installation: a. Loosen the four cap screws that fasten the transmitter to the base.
Figure 10-3: Integral installation components
Transmitter
Transition ring
4 x cap screws (4 mm)
Base
Core processor b. Rotate the transmitter counter-clockwise so that the cap screws are in the unlocked position.
c. Gently lift the transmitter straight up, disengaging it from the cap screws.
4.
If you have a 9-wire remote installation:
Configuration and Use Manual
207
Troubleshooting
208 a. Remove the end-cap.
Figure 10-4: 9-wire remote installation components
Transmitter
Core processor
4 x cap screws (4 mm)
End-cap b. Inside the core processor housing, loosen the three screws that hold the core processor mounting plate in place.
Do not remove the screws.
c. Rotate the mounting plate so that the screws are in the unlocked position.
d. Holding the tab on the mounting plate, slowly lower the mounting plate so that the top of the core processor is visible.
5.
At the core processor, disconnect the 4-wire cable between the core processor and the transmitter.
6.
Measure the resistance between core processor terminal pairs 3–4, 2–3, and 2–4.
Terminal pair
3–4
2–3
2–4
Function
RS-485/A and RS-485/B
VDC– and RS-485/A
VDC– and RS-485/B
Expected resistance
40 k Ω to 50 kΩ
20 k Ω to 25 kΩ
20 k
Ω to 25 kΩ
7.
If any resistance measurements are lower than specified, the core processor may not be able to communicate with a transmitter or a remote host. The meter may need factory service.
Postrequisites
To return to normal operation:
• For a 4-wire remote installation or a remote core processor with remote transmitter installation:
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Troubleshooting
1. Reconnect the 4-wire cable between the core processor and the transmitter.
2. Replace the core processor lid.
3. Restore power to the transmitter.
• For an integral installation:
1. Reconnect the 4-wire cable between the core processor and the transmitter.
2. Without pinching or stretching the wires, lower the transmitter onto the base, inserting the cap screws into the slots.
3. Rotate the transmitter clockwise so that the cap screws are in the locked position.
4. Tighten the cap screws, torquing to 20 to 30 in-lbs (2.3 to 3.4 N-m).
5. Restore power to the transmitter.
• For a 9-wire remote installation:
1. Reconnect the 4-wire cable between the core processor and the transmitter.
2. Without pinching or stressing the wires, slide the mounting plate into place.
3. Rotate the mounting plate so that the screws are in the locked position.
4. Tighten the screws, torquing to 6 to 8 in-lbs (0.7 to 0.9 N-m).
5. Replace the end-cap.
6. Restore power to the transmitter.
Important
When reassembling the meter components, be sure to grease all O-rings.
Configuration and Use Manual
209
Troubleshooting
210
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the transmitter display
Appendix A
Using the transmitter display
Topics covered in this appendix:
•
Components of the transmitter interface
•
Use the optical switches
•
Access and use the display menu system
•
Display codes for process variables
•
Codes and abbreviations used in display menus
•
Menu maps for the transmitter display
A.1
Components of the transmitter interface
The transmitter interface includes the status LED, the display (LCD panel), and two optical switches.
Configuration and Use Manual
211
Using the transmitter display
A.2
Figure A-1: Transmitter interface
A
B
H
G
C
F
D
E.
F.
G.
H.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E
Status LED
Display (LCD panel)
Process variable
Scroll
optical switch
Optical switch indicator
Select
optical switch
Unit of measure for process variable
Current value of process variable
Use the optical switches
Use the optical switches on the transmitter interface to control the transmitter display.
The transmitter has two optical switches: Scroll and Select.
To activate an optical switch, block the light by holding your thumb or finger in front of the opening.
Tip
You can activate the optical switch through the lens. Do not remove the transmitter housing cover.
The optical switch indicator lights up when the transmitter senses that an optical switch has been activated.
212
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the transmitter display
Table A-1: Optical switch indicator and optical switch states
Optical switch indicator
Solid red
Flashing red
State of optical switches
One optical switch is activated.
Both optical switches are activated.
A.3
Access and use the display menu system
The display menu system is used to perform various configuration, administrative, and maintenance tasks.
Tip
The display menu system does not provide complete configuration, administrative, or maintenance functions. For complete transmitter management, you must use another communications tool.
Prerequisites
To access the display menu system, operator access to either the Off-Line menu or the
Alarm menu must be enabled. To access the complete menu system, operator access must be enabled for both the Off-Line menu and the Alarm menu.
Procedure
1.
At the transmitter display, activate the Scroll and Select optical switches simultaneously until the display changes.
You will enter the Off-Line menu at any of several locations, depending on several factors.
• If an alarm is active and access to the Alarm menu is enabled, you will see SEE
ALARM .
• If no alarm is active and Smart Meter Verification is enabled on the transmitter, you will see ENTER METER VERFY.
• If no alarm is active and Smart Meter Verification is not enabled on the transmitter, you will see OFF_LINE MAINT.
2.
Use the Scroll and Select optical switches to navigate to your destination in the display menu system.
• Use Scroll to move through a list of options.
• Use Select to choose the current option.
3.
If CODE? appears on the display when you make a choice, enter the value that is configured for Off-Line Password.
a. With the cursor flashing on the first digit, activate Scroll until the correct digit is displayed, then activate Select.
b. Repeat this process for the second, third, and fourth digits.
Configuration and Use Manual
213
Using the transmitter display
A.3.1
Tip
If you do not know the correct value for Off-Line Password, wait 30 seconds. The password screen will time out automatically and you will be returned to the previous screen.
4.
If Scroll flashes on the display, activate the Scroll optical switch, then the Select optical switch, and then the Scroll optical switch again.
The display will prompt you through this sequence. The Scroll-Select-Scroll sequence is designed to guard against accidental activation of the off-line menu. It is not designed as a security measure.
5.
To exit a display menu and return to a higher-level menu:
• Activate Scroll until the EXIT option is displayed, then activate Select.
• If the EXIT option is not available, activate Scroll and Select simultaneously and hold until the screen returns to the previous display.
6.
To exit the display menu system, you can use either of the following methods:
• Exit each menu separately, working your way back to the top of the menu system.
• Wait until the display times out and returns to displaying process variable data.
Enter a floating-point value using the display
Certain configuration values (for example, Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value) are entered as floating-point values. The display supports both decimal notation and exponential notation for floating-point values.
The display allows you to enter a maximum of 8 characters, including the sign. The decimal point is not counted as a character. Exponential notation is used to enter values that require more than 8 characters.
Enter a floating-point value using decimal notation
Decimal notation allows you to enter values between –9999999 and 99999999. You can use the decimal point to enter values with a precision of 0 through 4 (4 characters to the right of the decimal point).
Decimal values entered via the display must meet the following requirements:
• They can contain a maximum of 8 digits, or 7 digits plus a minus sign (
−) to indicate a negative number.
• They can contain a decimal point. The decimal point does not count as a digit. The decimal point must be positioned so that the precision of the value does not exceed
4.
When you first enter the configuration screen, the current configuration value is displayed in decimal notation, and the active character is flashing. If the value is positive, no sign is displayed. If the value is negative, a minus sign is displayed.
214
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the transmitter display
Procedure
• To change the value:
1. Activate Select until the digit you want to change is active (flashing).
Select moves the cursor one position to the left. From the leftmost position, Select moves the cursor to the rightmost digit.
2. Activate Scroll to change the value of the active digit.
3. Repeat until all digits are set as desired.
• To change the sign of the value:
If the current value is negative, activate Select until the minus sign is flashing, then activate Scroll until the space is blank.
If the current value is positive and there is a blank space at the left of the value, activate Select until the cursor is flashing under the blank space, then activate
Scroll until the minus sign appears.
If the current value is positive and there is no blank space at the left of the value, activate Select until the cursor is flashing under the leftmost digit, then activate
Scroll
until the minus sign appears.
• To move the decimal point:
1. Activate Select until the decimal point is flashing.
2. Activate Scroll.
The decimal point is removed from its current position.
3. Activate Select and watch the position of the decimal point.
As the cursor moves to the left, the decimal point will flash between each pair of digits, up to a maximum precision of four (four digits to the right of the decimal point).
•
Tip
If the position is not valid, the decimal point is not displayed. Continue to activate Select until the decimal point appears at the right of the displayed value.
4. When the decimal point is in the desired position, activate Scroll.
The decimal point is inserted at its current position.
To save the displayed value to transmitter memory, activate Scroll and Select simultaneously and hold until the display changes.
If the displayed value is the same as the value in transmitter memory, you will be returned to the previous screen.
If the displayed value is not the same as the value in transmitter memory, SAVE/
YES?
flashes on the display. Activate Select.
Configuration and Use Manual
215
Using the transmitter display
216
• To exit the menu without saving the displayed value to transmitter memory, activate Scroll and Select simultaneously and hold until the display changes.
If the displayed value is the same as the value in transmitter memory, you will be returned to the previous screen.
If the displayed value is not the same as the value in transmitter memory, SAVE/
YES?
flashes on the display. Activate Scroll.
Enter a floating-point value using exponential notation
Exponential notation is used to enter values that are larger than 99999999 or smaller than
−9999999.
Exponential values entered via the display must be in the following form: SX.XXXEYY. In this string:
• S = Sign. A minus sign ( −) indicates a negative number. A blank indicates a positive number.
• X.XXX = The 4-digit mantissa.
• E = The exponent indicator.
• YY = The 2-digit exponent.
Procedure
1.
Switch from decimal notation to exponential notation.
a. Activate Select as required until the rightmost digit is flashing.
b. Activate Scroll until E is displayed.
c. Activate Select.
Tip
If you have modified the value in decimal notation without saving the changes to transmitter memory, the changes will be lost when you switch to exponential notation. Save the decimal value before switching to exponential notation.
2.
Enter the exponent.
The first character may be a minus sign or any digit between 0 and 3. The second character may be any digit between 0 and 9.
a. Activate Select to move the cursor to the rightmost character on the display.
b. Activate Scroll until the desired character is displayed.
c. Activate Select to move the cursor one position to the left.
d. Activate Scroll until the desired character is displayed.
3.
Enter the mantissa.
The mantissa must be a 4-digit value with a precision of 3 (that is, all values between
0.000 and 9.999).
a. Activate Select to move the cursor to the rightmost digit in the mantissa.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the transmitter display b. Activate Scroll until the desired character is displayed.
c. Activate Select to move the cursor one digit to the left.
d. Activate Scroll until the desired character is displayed.
e. Activate Select to move the cursor one digit to the left.
f. Activate Scroll until the desired character is displayed.
g. Activate Select to move the cursor one digit to the left.
h. Activate Scroll until the desired character is displayed.
4.
Enter the sign.
a. Activate Select to move the cursor one digit to the left.
b. Activate Scroll until the desired character is displayed.
For positive numbers, select a blank space.
5.
To save the displayed value to transmitter memory, activate Scroll and Select simultaneously and hold until the display changes.
• If the displayed value is the same as the value in transmitter memory, you will be returned to the previous screen.
• If the displayed value is not the same as the value in transmitter memory, SAVE/
YES?
flashes on the display. Activate Select.
6.
(Optional) Switch back from exponential notation to decimal notation.
a. Activate Select until the E is flashing.
b. Activate Select until d is displayed.
c. Activate Select.
A.4
Display codes for process variables
Certain configuration values (for example, Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value) are entered as floating-point values. The display supports both decimal notation and exponential notation for floating-point values.
Table A-2: Display codes for process variables
Code
AVE_D
AVE_T
BRD_T
CONC
DRIVE%
EXT_P
EXT_T
Definition
Average density
Average temperature
Board temperature
Concentration
Drive gain
External pressure
External temperature
Comment or reference
Configuration and Use Manual
217
Using the transmitter display
NET V
NETMI
NETVI
PWRIN
RDENS
RPO_A
SGU
STD V
STDVI
TCDENS
TCORI
TCORR
TCVOL
TUBEF
WTAVE
Table A-2: Display codes for process variables
(continued)
Code
FVZ
GSV F
GSV I
GSV T
LPO_A
LVOLI
LZERO
MASSI
MTR_T
NET M
Definition
Field verification zero
Gas standard volume flow
Gas standard volume inventory
Gas standard volume total
Left pickoff amplitude
Volume inventory
Live zero flow
Mass inventory
Case temperature (T-Series sensors only)
Net mass flow rate
Net volume flow rate
Net mass inventory
Net volume inventory
Input voltage
Density at reference temperature
Right pickoff amplitude
Specific gravity units
Standard volume flow rate
Standard volume inventory
Temperature-corrected density
Temperature-corrected inventory
Temperature-corrected total
Temperature-corrected volume
Raw tube frequency
Weighted average
Comment or reference
Weights & Measures application only
Concentration measurement application only
Concentration measurement application only
Concentration measurement application only
Concentration measurement application only
Refers to power input to the core processor
Concentration measurement application only
Concentration measurement application only
Concentration measurement application only
Petroleum measurement application only
Petroleum measurement application only
Petroleum measurement application only
Petroleum measurement application only
218
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the transmitter display
A.5
Codes and abbreviations used in display menus
Table A-3: Codes and abbreviations used in display menus
Code or abbreviation
ACK ALARM
ACK ALL
ACT
ADDR
AO 1 SRC
Definition
Acknowledge alarm
Acknowledge all alarms
Action
Address
Fixed to the process variable assigned to the primary output
Analog output 1 (primary mA output)
Analog output 2 (secondary mA output)
Auto Scroll
Backlight
AO1
AO2
AUTO SCRLL
BKLT
B LIGHT
CAL
CH A
CH B
CH C
CHANGE PASSW
CHANGE CODE
CONFG
CORE
CUR Z
CUSTODY XFER
D EV
Calibrate
Channel A
Channel B
Channel C
Change password or passcode
Configuration
Core processor
Current zero
Custody transfer
Discrete event
Comment or reference
Change the password or passcode required for access to display functions
Events configured using the enhanced event model
DENS Density
DGAIN, DRIVE % Drive gain
DI
DISBL
Discrete input
Disable
DO1
DO2
DSPLY
E1OR2
Discrete output 1
Discrete output 2
Display
Event 1 or Event 2
Select
to disable
ENABL
ENABLE ACK
Enable
Enable acknowledge all
Events configured using the basic event model
Select to enable
Enable or disable the ACK ALL function
Configuration and Use Manual
219
Using the transmitter display
EXTRN
FAC Z
FCF
FL SW
FLSWT
FLDIR
FO
FO FREQ
FO RATE
FR FL
FREQ
GSV
HYSTRSIS
INTERN
IO
LANG
LOCK
LOOP CUR
MTR F
M_ASC
M_RTU
MAO1
MAO2
Table A-3: Codes and abbreviations used in display menus
(continued)
Code or abbreviation
ENABLE ALARM
ENABLE AUTO
Definition
Enable alarm menu
Enable Auto Scroll
ENABLE OFFLN
ENABLE PASSW
ENABLE RESET
ENABLE START
EVNT1
EVNT2
Enable off-line
Enable password
Enable totalizer reset
Enable totalizer start
Event 1
Event 2
Comment or reference
Access to alarm menu from display
Enable or disable the Auto Scroll function
Access to off-line menu from display
Enable or disable password protection for display functions
Enable or disable totalizer reset from display
Enable or disable totalizer start/stop from display
Event configured using the basic event model only
Event configured using the basic event model only
External
Factory zero
Flow calibration factor
Flow switch
Flow direction
Frequency output
Frequency factor
Rate factor
Frequency=Flow
Frequency
Gas standard volume
Hysteresis
Internal
Input/output
Language
Write-protect
Loop current
Meter factor
Modbus ASCII
Modbus RTU mA output 1 (primary mA output) mA output 2 (secondary mA output)
220
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the transmitter display
Table A-3: Codes and abbreviations used in display menus
(continued)
POLAR
PRESS
QUAD r.
SCALE
SIM
Code or abbreviation
MASS
MBUS
MFLOW
MSMT
OFFLN
Definition
Mass flow
Modbus
Mass flow
Measurement
Off-line
OFF-LINE MAINT Off-line maintenance
P/UNT Pulses/unit
Polarity
Pressure
Quadrature
Revision
Scaling method
Simulation
Comment or reference
Used for loop testing, not simulation mode. Simulation mode is not accessible via the display.
SPECL
SRC
TEMP, TEMPR
UNT/P
VAR 1
VER
VERFY
VFLOW
VOL
WRPRO
XMTR
Special
Source
Temperature
Units/pulse
Display Variable 1
Version
Verify
Volume flow
Volume, volume flow
Write protect
Transmitter
Variable assignment
Configuration and Use Manual
221
Using the transmitter display
A.6
Menu maps for the transmitter display
Figure A-2: Offline menu – top level
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
SEE ALARM
Scroll
VER
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
EXIT
Scroll
CONFG
Scroll
SIM
Scroll
ZERO
Scroll
SENSOR VERFY*
Scroll
*This option is displayed only if the transmitter is connected to an enhanced core processor and the meter verification software is installed on the transmitter.
EXIT
222
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Figure A-3: Offline menu – version information
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
VER
Version info
CEQ/ETO info*
Scroll
ED/API info*
Scroll
CUSTODY XFER*
SENSOR VERFY*
Scroll
EXIT
*The option is displayed only if the corresponding CEQ/
ETO or application is installed on the transmitter.
Using the transmitter display
Configuration and Use Manual
223
Using the transmitter display
Figure A-4: Offline menu – configuration: units and I/O
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
CONFG
Select
UNITS
Select
MASS
Scroll
VOL/GSV
Scroll
DENS
Scroll
TEMP
Scroll
PRESS
Scroll
EXIT
Scroll
IO
Select
CH A
Select
AO 1 SRC
Scroll
AO 1 4 MA
Scroll
AO 120 MA
Scroll
EXIT
Scroll
CH B
Select
FO
Select
FO SRC
Scroll
FO FREQ
Scroll
FO RATE
Scroll
FO POLAR
Scroll
EXIT
Scroll
Scroll
DO
Select
DO SRC
Scroll
DO POLAR
Scroll
CONFIG FL SW
Select
SOURCE FL SW
Scroll
SETPOINT FL SW
Scroll
EXIT
224
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the transmitter display
Figure A-5: Offline menu – configuration: meter factor, display, and digital communications
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
CONFG
Select
UNITS
Scroll Scroll Scroll Scroll
Scroll
DENS
Scroll
EXIT
MTR F
Select
MASS
Scroll
VOL
*If you disable access to the offline menu, the offline menu will disappear as soon as you exit. To re-enable access, you must use
ProLink II or the Communicator.
**If Auto Scroll is enabled, a Scroll Rate screen is displayed immediately after the Auto Scroll screen.
***If either password is enabled, a Change Code screen will be displsayed.
DISPLAY
Select
TOTALS RESET
Scroll
TOTALS STOP
Scroll
DISPLAY OFFLN*
Scroll
DISPLAY ALARM
Scroll
DISPLAY ACK
Scroll
AUTO SCRLL**
Scroll
CODE OFFLINE***
Scroll
CODE ALARM***
Scroll
DISPLAY RATE
Scroll
DISPLAY BKLT
Scroll
DISPLAY LANG
Scroll
EXIT
COMM
Select
PROTOCOL
Scroll
BAUD
Scroll
PARITY
Scroll
STOP BITS
Scroll
ADDRESS MBUS
Scroll
ADDRESS HART
Scroll
LOOP CURR HART
Scroll
EXIT
LOCK
Configuration and Use Manual
225
Using the transmitter display
Figure A-6: Offline menu – alarms
Select
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
SEE ALARM
Yes
Select
ACK ALL*
No
Scroll
EXIT
Select Scroll
Yes
Alarm code
Scroll Select
Select
Yes
ACK
No
Scroll
Active/ unacknowledged alarms?
No
NO ALARM
Scroll
EXIT
*This screen is displayed only if the ACK ALL function s enabled and there are unacknowledged alarms.
226
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the transmitter display
Figure A-7: Offline menu – meter verification: top level
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
Scroll
ENTER METER VERFY
Select
RUN VERFY
Select
Scroll
RESULTS READ
Select
Scroll
SCHEDULE VERFY
Select
Scroll
EXIT
Scroll Select
Figure A-8: Offline menu – meter verification schedule
SCHEDULE VERFY
Select
No Schedule set?
SCHED IS OFF
Scroll
SET NEXT
Select
xx HOURS
SAVE/YES?
Scroll
No Yes
Select
Scroll
SET RECUR
Select
xx HOURS
SAVE/YES?
Scroll
No Yes
Select
Yes
TURN OFF SCHED/YES?
Scroll Select
Schedule deleted
HOURS LEFT
Scroll Select
xx HOURS
Select
Scroll
Scroll
EXIT
Select
Configuration and Use Manual
227
Using the transmitter display
Figure A-9: Offline menu – meter verification test
RUN VERFY
Select
OUTPUTS
Select
CONTINUE MEASR
Select
Scroll
Scroll
EXIT
FAULT
Select
Scroll
ARE YOU SURE/YES?
Select
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x%
Select
LAST VALUE
Select
Scroll
SENSOR ABORT/YES?
Scroll Select
PASS VERFY
Scroll
RESULTS VIEW/YES?
Scroll Select
To Runcount
(see Results Read)
Pass Test result
Fail
CAUTION VERFY
Scroll
Abort
ABORTED VERFY
Scroll
Abort Type
Scroll
RERUN/YES?
Yes
Correct condition
No
Scroll
Select
To Enter Meter Verfy
EXIT
228
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the transmitter display
Figure A-10: Offline menu – meter verification results
xx HOURS
Select
PASS
Select
xx L STF%
Select
xx R STF%
Select
Pass
To Runcount x-1
RESULTS READ
Select
RUNCOUNT x
Select
Result type
Fail xx HOURS
Select
CAUTION
Select
xx L STF%
Select
xx R STF%
Select
Abort xx HOURS
Select
Abort Type
Select
RESULTS MORE?
Select Scroll
To Run Verfy
Scroll
Configuration and Use Manual
229
Using the transmitter display
Figure A-11: Offline menu – totalizers and inventories
Process variable display
Scroll
Mass total
Scroll
Volume total
Select
EXIT
Scroll
E1--SP
(1)
E2--SP
(1)
Scroll
Scroll
STOP/START
(2)
Select
STOP/START YES?
Select
Yes No
Scroll
Scroll
RESET
(3)
Select
RESET YES?
Select
Yes No
Scroll
Scroll
(1)
The Event Setpoint screens can be used to define or change the setpoint for Event 1 or Event 2 in the basic event model.
These screens are displayed only if the event is defined on mass total or volume total. Note that this functionality does not apply to discrete events (the enhanced event model).
(2)
The transmitter must be configured to allow starting and stopping totalizers from the display.
(3)
The transmitter must be configured to allow resetting totalizers from the display.
230
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the transmitter display
Figure A-12: Offline menu – Simulation (loop testing)
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
SIM
AO SIM
Select
SET x MA*
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select***
Scroll
EXIT
Scroll
FO SIM
Select
SET y KHZ****
Scroll
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select***
Scroll
EXIT
DO SIM
Select
SET ON
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select***
Scroll
SET OFF
*The output can be fixed at 2, 4, 12, 20, or 22 mA.
**Fixes the output.
***Unfixes the output.
****The output can be fixed at 1, 10, or 15 kHz.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select***
Scroll
EXIT
Configuration and Use Manual
231
Using the transmitter display
Figure A-13: Offline menu – Zero
Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
ZERO
Select
CAL ZERO
Select
Scroll
ZERO/YES?
No Yes
Select
………………….
Scroll
CAL FAIL
Troubleshoot
CAL PASS
Select
RESTORE ZERO
Scroll Select
Scroll
Select
Current zero display
Scroll
Factory zero display
Scroll
RESTORE ZERO
Scroll
RESTORE EXIT
EXIT
Select
RESTORE ZERO/YES?
Yes
Select
No
Scroll
232
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Appendix B
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Topics covered in this appendix:
•
Basic information about ProLink II
•
Connect with ProLink II
•
Menu maps for ProLink II
B.1
Basic information about ProLink II
ProLink II is a software tool available from Micro Motion. It runs on a Windows platform and provides complete access to transmitter functions and data.
ProLink II requirements
To install ProLink II, you must have:
• The ProLink II installation media
• The ProLink II installation kit for your connection type
To obtain ProLink II and the appropriate installation kit, contact Micro Motion.
ProLink II documentation
Most of the instructions in this manual assume that you are already familiar with ProLink II or that you have a general familiarity with Windows programs. If you need more information than this manual provides, see the ProLink II manual (ProLink
Micro Motion
®
Transmitters: Installation and Use Manual).
®
II Software for
In most ProLink II installations, the manual is installed with the ProLink II program.
Additionally, the ProLink II manual is available on the Micro Motion documentation CD or the Micro Motion web site ( www.micromotion.com
).
ProLink II features and functions
ProLink II offers complete transmitter configuration and operation functions. ProLink II also offers a number of additional features and functions, including:
• The ability to save the transmitter configuration set to a file on the PC, and reload it or propagate it to other transmitters
• The ability to log specific types of data to a file on the PC
• A commissioning wizard
• A proving wizard
• A gas wizard
These features are documented in the ProLink II manual. They are not documented in the current manual.
Configuration and Use Manual
233
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
B.2
B.2.1
ProLink II messages
As you use ProLink II with a Micro Motion transmitter, you will see a number of messages and notes. This manual does not document all of these messages and notes.
Important
The user is responsible for responding to messages and notes and complying with all safety messages.
Connect with ProLink II
A connection from ProLink II to your transmitter allows you to read process data, configure the transmitter, and perform maintenance and troubleshooting tasks.
ProLink II connection types
Different connection types are available for connecting from ProLink II to the transmitter.
Choose the connection type appropriate to your network and the tasks you intend to perform.
The transmitter supports the following ProLink II connection types:
• Service port connections
• HART/Bell 202 connections
• HART/RS-485 connections
• Modbus/RS-485 7-bit connections (Modbus ASCII)
• Modbus/RS-485 8-bit connections (Modbus RTU)
When selecting a connection type, consider the following:
• Service port connections use standard connection parameters that are already defined in ProLink II, and therefore you do not have to configure them.
• HART/Bell 202 connections use standard HART connection parameters that are already defined in ProLink II. The only parameter you must configure is the transmitter address.
• Some connection types require opening the wiring compartment or the power supply compartment. These connection types should be used only for temporary connections, and may require extra safety precautions.
• Modbus connections, including service port connections, are typically faster than
HART connections.
• When you are using a HART connection, ProLink II will not allow you to open more than one window at a time. This is done to manage network traffic and optimize speed.
• You cannot make concurrent connections if the connections use the same terminals. You can make concurrent connections if the connections use different terminals.
234
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
B.2.2
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Make a service port connection
CAUTION!
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not use a service port connection. Service port connections require opening the wiring compartment, and opening the wiring compartment while the transmitter is powered up could cause an explosion. To connect to the transmitter in a hazardous environment, use a connection method that does not require removing the transmitter housing cover.
Prerequisites
• ProLink II installed and licensed on your PC
• One of the following:
RS-232 to RS-485 signal converter
USB to RS-485 signal converter
• An available serial port or USB port
• Adapters as required (for example, 9-pin to 25-pin)
Procedure
1.
Attach the signal converter to the serial port or USB port on your PC.
2.
Access the service port terminals: a. Remove the transmitter end-cap to access the wiring compartment.
b. Loosen the screw on the Warning flap and open the power supply compartment.
3.
Connect the leads from the signal converter to the service port, terminals 7 (RS-485/
A) and 8 (RS-485/B).
Tip
Usually, but not always, the black lead is RS-485/A and the red lead is RS-485/B.
Configuration and Use Manual
235
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Figure B-1: Connection to service port
A
E
B C D
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C. Service port terminal 7 (RS-485/A)
D. Service port terminal 8 (RS-485/B)
E. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
4.
Start ProLink II.
5.
Choose Connection > Connect to Device.
6.
Set Protocol to Service Port.
B.2.3
Tip
Service port connections use standard connection parameters and a standard address. You do not need to configure them here.
7.
Set the COM Port value to the PC COM port that you are using for this connection.
8.
Click Connect.
Need help?
If an error message appears:
• Switch the leads and try again.
• Ensure that you have specified the correct COM port.
• Check the physical connection between the PC and the transmitter.
Make a HART/Bell 202 connection
You can connect directly to the mA terminals on the transmitter, to any point in a local
HART loop, or to any point in a HART multidrop network.
236
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
CAUTION!
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not connect directly to the transmitter terminals.
Connecting directly to the transmitter terminals requires opening the wiring compartment, and opening the wiring compartment while the transmitter is powered up could cause an explosion. To connect to the transmitter in a hazardous environment, use a connection method that does not require opening the wiring compartment.
CAUTION!
If you connect directly to the mA terminals, the transmitter's mA output may be affected. If you are using the mA output for flow control, set devices for manual control before connecting directly to the mA terminals.
•
•
Prerequisites
•
•
ProLink II installed and licensed on your PC
One of the following:
RS-232 to Bell 202 signal converter
USB to Bell 202 signal converter
An available serial port or USB port
Adapters as required (for example, 9-pin to 25-pin)
Procedure
1.
Attach the signal converter to the serial port or USB port on your PC.
2.
To connect directly to the transmitter terminals: a. Remove the transmitter end-cap to access the wiring compartment.
b. Connect the leads from the signal converter to terminals 1 and 2.
Tip
HART connections are not polarity-sensitive. It does not matter which lead you attach to which terminal.
c. Add resistance as necessary.
Important
HART/Bell 202 connections require a voltage drop of 1 VDC. To achieve this, add resistance of 250–600
Ω to the connection.
Configuration and Use Manual
237
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Figure B-2: Connection to transmitter terminals
A
C
D
B
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C.
250–600
Ω
resistance
D. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
3.
To connect from a point in the local HART loop: a. Attach the leads from the signal converter to any point in the loop.
b. Add resistance as necessary.
Important
HART/Bell 202 connections require a voltage drop of 1 VDC. To achieve this, add resistance of
250–600
Ω to the connection.
238
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Figure B-3: Connection over local loop
E
A
D
R3
R2
C
R1
B
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C. Any combination of resistors R1, R2, and R3 as necessary to meet HART communication resistance requirements
D. DCS or PLC
E. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
4.
To connect over a HART multidrop network: a. Attach the leads from the signal converter to any point on the network.
b. Add resistance as necessary.
Important
HART/Bell 202 connections require a voltage drop of 1 VDC. To achieve this, add resistance of 250–600
Ω to the connection.
Configuration and Use Manual
239
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Figure B-4: Connection over multidrop network
D
B
A
C
A. Signal converter
B.
250–600
Ω
resistance
C. Devices on the network
D. Master device
5.
Start ProLink II.
6.
Choose Connection > Connect to Device.
7.
Set Protocol to HART Bell 202.
Tip
HART/Bell 202 connections use standard connection parameters. You do not need to configure them here.
8.
If you are using a USB signal converter, enable Converter Toggles RTS.
9.
Set Address/Tag to the HART polling address configured in the transmitter.
Tips
• If this is the first time you are connecting to the transmitter, use the default address: 0.
• If you are not in a HART multidrop environment, the HART polling address is typically left at the default value.
• If you are unsure of the transmitter’s address, click Poll. The program will search the network and return a list of the transmitters that it detects.
10.
Set the COM Port value to the PC COM port that you are using for this connection.
11.
Set Master as appropriate.
Option Description
Secondary Use this setting if another HART host such as a DCS is on the network.
240
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
B.2.4
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Option Description
Primary Use this setting if no other host is on the network. The Field Communicator is not a host.
12.
Click Connect.
Need help?
If an error message appears:
• Verify the HART address of the transmitter.
• Ensure that you have specified the correct COM port.
• Check the physical connection between the PC and the transmitter.
• Increase or decrease resistance.
• Ensure that there is no conflict with another HART master.
Make a HART/RS-485 connection
You can connect directly to the RS-485 terminals on the transmitter or to any point on the network.
CAUTION!
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not connect directly to the transmitter terminals.
Connecting directly to the transmitter terminals requires opening the wiring compartment, and opening the wiring compartment while the transmitter is powered up could cause an explosion. To connect to the transmitter in a hazardous environment, use a connection method that does not require opening the wiring compartment.
•
•
Prerequisites
•
•
ProLink II installed and licensed on your PC
One of the following:
RS-232 to RS-485 signal converter
USB to RS-485 signal converter
An available serial port or USB port
Adapters as required (for example, 9-pin to 25-pin)
Procedure
1.
Attach the signal converter to the serial port or USB port on your PC.
2.
To connect directly to the transmitter terminals: a. Remove the transmitter end-cap to access the wiring compartment.
b. Connect the leads from the signal converter to terminals 5 (RS-485/A) and 6
(RS-485/B).
Configuration and Use Manual
241
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Tip
HART connections are not polarity-sensitive. It does not matter which lead you attach to which terminal.
Figure B-5: Connection to transmitter terminals
C
A
B
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
3.
To connect over the RS-485 network: a. Attach the leads from the signal converter to any point on the network.
b. Add resistance as necessary.
242
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Figure B-6: Connection over network
A
D
E
C
B
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C. 120-
Ω
, 1/2-watt resistors at both ends of the segment, if necessary
D. DCS or PLC
E. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
4.
Start ProLink II.
5.
Choose Connection > Connect to Device.
6.
Set the connection parameters to the values configured in the transmitter.
If your transmitter has not been configured, use the default values shown here.
Table B-1: Default HART/RS-485 connection parameters
Parameter
Protocol
Baud
Parity
Stop Bits
Address
Default values
HART
1200
Odd
1
0
Tip
If you do not know the transmitter’s RS-485 communication settings, you can connect through the service port, which always uses default settings, or use another communications tool to view or change the settings.
7.
Set the COM Port value to the PC COM port that you are using for this connection.
8.
Set Master as appropriate.
Configuration and Use Manual
243
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
B.2.5
244
Option Description
Secondary Use this setting if another HART host such as a DCS is on the network.
Primary Use this setting if no other host is on the network. The Field Communicator is not a host.
9.
Click Connect.
Need help?
If an error message appears:
• Verify the HART address of the transmitter.
• Ensure that you have specified the correct COM port.
• Check the physical connection between the PC and the transmitter.
• Ensure that there is no conflict with another HART master.
• For long-distance communication, or if noise from an external source interferes with the signal, install 120-
Ω ½-W terminating resistors in parallel with the output at both ends of the communication segment.
Make a Modbus/RS-485 connection
You can connect directly to the RS-485 terminals on the transmitter or to any point on the network.
CAUTION!
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not connect directly to the transmitter terminals.
Connecting directly to the transmitter terminals requires opening the wiring compartment, and opening the wiring compartment while the transmitter is powered up could cause an explosion. To connect to the transmitter in a hazardous environment, use a connection method that does not require opening the wiring compartment.
•
•
Prerequisites
•
•
ProLink II installed and licensed on your PC
One of the following:
RS-232 to RS-485 signal converter
USB to RS-485 signal converter
An available serial port or USB port
Adapters as required (for example, 9-pin to 25-pin)
Procedure
1.
Attach the signal converter to the serial port or USB port on your PC.
2.
To connect directly to the transmitter terminals: a. Remove the transmitter end-cap to access the wiring compartment.
b. Connect the leads from the signal converter to terminals 5 (RS-485/A) and 6
(RS-485/B).
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Tip
Usually, but not always, the black lead is RS-485/A and the red lead is RS-485/B.
Figure B-7: Connection to transmitter terminals
C
A
B
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
3.
To connect over the RS-485 network: a. Attach the leads from the signal converter to any point on the network.
b. Add resistance as necessary.
Configuration and Use Manual
245
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Figure B-8: Connection over network
A
D
E
C
B
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C. 120-
Ω
, 1/2-watt resistors at both ends of the segment, if necessary
D. DCS or PLC
E. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
4.
Start ProLink II.
5.
Choose Connection > Connect to Device.
6.
Set the connection parameters to the values configured in the transmitter.
If your transmitter has not been configured, use the default values shown here.
Table B-2: Default Modbus/RS-485 connection parameters
Parameter
Protocol
Baud
Parity
Stop Bits
Address
Default value
Modbus RTU
9600
Odd
1
1
246
Tip
If you do not know the transmitter’s RS-485 communication settings, you can connect through the service port, which always uses default settings, or use another communications tool to view or change the settings.
7.
Set the COM Port value to the PC COM port that you are using for this connection.
8.
Click Connect.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Need help?
If an error message appears:
• Verify the Modbus address of the transmitter.
• Ensure that you have specified the correct COM port.
• Check the physical connection between the PC and the transmitter.
• Increase or decrease resistance.
• For long-distance communication, or if noise from an external source interferes with the signal, install 120-
Ω ½-W terminating resistors in parallel with the output at both ends of the communication segment.
• Ensure that there is no concurrent Modbus communication to the transmitter.
B.3
Menu maps for ProLink II
Figure B-9: Main menu
File View
Additional configuration options
Connection
Load from Xmtr to File
Save to Xmtr from File
License
Connect to Device
Connect to Densitometer/
Viscometer
Disconnect
Preferences
•
Use External Temperature
•
Enable Inventory Totals Reset
• Enable External Pressure Compensation
• Copper RTD
Installed options
Configuration and Use Manual
247
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Figure B-10: Main menu (continued)
ProLink Tools Plug-ins
Gas Unit Configurator
Meter Verification
Entrained Gas Analyzer
Commissioning Wizard
Proving Wizard
Marine Bunker Transfer
Options
Data Logging*
Enable/Disable
Custody Transfer
Configuration
Output Levels
Process Variables
Status
Alarm Log
Diagnostic Information
Calibration
Test
API Totalizer Control
CM Totalizer Control
Totalizer Control
Core Processor Diagnostics
Finger Print
API Process Variables
CM Process Variables
PPI Variables
ED Process Variables
Batcher Control
Run Filler
NOC – Well Performance Measurement
*For information about using Data Logger, refer to the ProLink II manual.
248
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Figure B-11: Configuration menu
Flow
• Flow Direction
• Flow Damp
•
Flow Cal
•
Mass Flow Cutoff
•
Mass Flow units
• Mass Factor
• Dens Factor
•
Vol Factor
•
Flow Switch Variable
•
Flow Switch Setpoint
• Flow Switch Hysteresis
• Vol Flow Cutoff
•
Vol Flow Units
•
Vol Flow Type
•
Std Gas Vol Flow Cutoff
• Std Gas Vol Flow Units
• Std Gas Density
•
Gas Wizard
T Series
• FTG
•
FFQ
•
DTG
•
DFQ1
• DFQ2
• K3
•
D3
•
D4
•
K4
ProLink >
Configuration
Additional configuration options
Density
• Dens Units
• Dens Damping
•
Slug High Limit
•
Slug Low Limit
•
Slug Duration
• Low Density Cutoff
• K1
•
K2
•
FD
•
D1
• D2
• Temp Coeff (DT)
Configuration and Use Manual
249
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Figure B-12: Configuration menu (continued)
ProLink >
Configuration
Additional configuration options
Analog Output
Primary Output
• PV is
• LRV
•
URV
•
AO Cutoff
•
AO Added Damp
• LSL
• USL
•
Min Span
•
AO Fault Action
•
AO Fault Level
• Last Measured Value Timeout
Frequency/Discrete Output
•
Frequency
• Tertiary Variable
• Freq Factor
•
Rate Factor
•
Freq Pulse Width
•
Last Measured Value Timeout
• Scaling Method
• Pulses Per lbs
• lbs Per Pulse
•
Freq Fault Action
•
Freq Fault Level
• Freq Output Polarity
• Discrete Output
•
DO Assignment
•
DO Polarity
•
DO Fault Action
Temperature
•
Temp Units
•
Temp Cal Factor
• Temp Damping
• External Temperature
•
External RTD
Pressure
• Flow Factor
• Dens Factor
•
Cal Pressure
•
Pressure Units
•
External Pressure
250
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Figure B-13: Configuration menu (continued)
ProLink >
Configuration
Additional configuration options
Device
•
Model
• Manufacturer
• Hardware Rev
•
Distributor
•
Software Rev
•
ETO
• CP Software Rev
• CP ETO
•
Option Board
•
Firmware Checksum
•
CP Firmware Checksum
• Tag
• Date
•
Descriptor
•
Message
•
Sensor type
• Transmitter Serial
• Floating PT Ordering
•
Add Comm Resp Delay
•
Restore Factory Configuration
•
Digital Comm Fault Setting
• HART Address
• Enable Loop Current Mode
•
HART Device ID
•
Modbus Address
•
Enable Write Protection
• Update Rate
• Response Time
•
Enable Burst
•
Burst Cmd
•
Burst Var 1...4
Discrete Input
•
Start Sensor Zero
• Reset Mass Total
• Reset Volume Total
•
Reset All Totals
•
Start/Stop All
Totalization
• Reset Gas Std
Volume Total
•
Start Meter
Verification
Configuration and Use Manual
251
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Figure B-14: Configuration menu (continued)
ProLink >
Configuration
Additional configuration options
RS-485
•
Protocol
•
Parity
• Baud Rate
• Stop Bits
Events
Event 1/2
•
Variable
• Type
• Setpoint
Discrete Events
•
Event Name
•
Event Type
• Process Variable
• Low Setpoint (A)
•
High Setpoint (B)
Alarm
•
Alarm
•
Severity
Polled Variables
Polled Variable 1/2
•
Polling Control
• External Tag
• Variable Type
•
Current Value
252
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Figure B-15: Configuration menu (continued)
ProLink >
Configuration
Additional configuration options
Special Units
• Base Mass Unit
• Base Mass Time
•
Mass Flow Conv Fact
•
Mass Flow Text
•
Mass Total Text
• Base Vol Unit
•
Base Vol Time
•
Vol Flow Conv Fact
•
Vol Flow Text
• Vol Total Text
Display
• mA1
• Var1...Var15
•
Display Precision
•
Var
•
Number of Decimals
• Display Language
• Display Start/Stop Totalizers
•
Display Totalizer Reset
•
Display Auto Scroll
•
Display Offline Menu
• Display Offline Password
• Display Alarm Menu
•
Display Ack All Alarms
•
Display Backlight On/Off
•
Display Alarm Screen Password
• Display Status LED Blinking
• Display Variable 1 Selection
•
Offline Password
•
Auto Scroll Rate
•
Update Period
Configuration and Use Manual
253
Using ProLink II with the transmitter
Figure B-16: Configuration menu (continued)
ProLink >
Configuration
Variable mapping
•
PV is
•
SV is
•
TV is
• QV is
System
•
Weights and Measures
Approval
•
Software Rev
• Totalizer Reset Options
Sensor
•
Sensor s/n
•
Sensor Model
•
Sensor Matl
• Liner Matl
•
Flange
Sensor Simulation
• Enable/disable
•
Mass flow
•
Wave form
•
Fixed value
• Period
• Minimum
•
Maximum
•
Density
•
Wave form
• Fixed value
• Period
•
Minimum
•
Maximum
•
Temperature
• Wave form
• Fixed value
•
Period
•
Minimum
•
Maximum
254
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Appendix C
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Topics covered in this appendix:
•
Basic information about ProLink III
•
Connect with ProLink III
•
Menu maps for ProLink III
C.1
Basic information about ProLink III
ProLink III is a configuration and service tool available from Micro Motion. It runs on a
Windows platform and provides complete access to transmitter functions and data.
ProLink III requirements
To install ProLink III, you must have:
• The ProLink III installation media
• The ProLink III installation kit for your connection type
To obtain ProLink III and the appropriate installation kit, contact Micro Motion.
ProLink III documentation
Most of the instructions in this manual assume that you are already familiar with ProLink III or that you have a general familiarity with Windows programs. If you need more information than this manual provides, see the ProLink III manual (ProLink
and Service Tool for Micro Motion
®
Transmitters: User Manual).
®
III Configuration
In most ProLink III installations, the manual is installed with the ProLink III program.
Additionally, the ProLink III manual is available on the Micro Motion documentation CD or the Micro Motion web site ( www.micromotion.com
).
ProLink III features and functions
ProLink III offers complete transmitter configuration and operation functions. ProLink III also offers a number of additional features and functions, including:
• The ability to save the transmitter configuration set to a file on the PC, and reload it or propagate it to other transmitters
• The ability to log specific types of data to a file on the PC
• The ability to view performance trends for various types of data on the PC
• The ability to connect to and view information for more than one device
• A guided connection wizard
These features are documented in the ProLink III manual. They are not documented in the current manual.
Configuration and Use Manual
255
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
C.2
C.2.1
ProLink III messages
As you use ProLink III with a Micro Motion transmitter, you will see a number of messages and notes. This manual does not document all of these messages and notes.
Important
The user is responsible for responding to messages and notes and complying with all safety messages.
Connect with ProLink III
A connection from ProLink III to your transmitter allows you to read process data, configure the transmitter, and perform maintenance and troubleshooting tasks.
ProLink III connection types
Different connection types are available for connecting from ProLink III to the transmitter.
Choose the connection type appropriate to your network and the tasks you intend to perform.
The transmitter supports the following ProLink III connection types:
• Service port connections
• HART/Bell 202 connections
• HART/RS-485 connections
• Modbus/RS-485 7-bit connections (Modbus ASCII)
• Modbus/RS-485 8-bit connections (Modbus RTU)
When selecting a connection type, consider the following:
• Service port connections use standard connection parameters that are already defined in ProLink III, and therefore you do not have to configure them.
• HART/Bell 202 connections use standard HART connection parameters that are already defined in ProLink III. The only parameter you must configure is the transmitter address.
• Some connection types require opening the wiring compartment or the power supply compartment. These connection types should be used only for temporary connections, and may require extra safety precautions.
• Modbus connections, including service port connections, are typically faster than
HART connections.
• When you are using a HART connection, ProLink III will not allow you to open more than one window at a time. This is done to manage network traffic and optimize speed.
• You cannot make concurrent connections if the connections use the same terminals. You can make concurrent connections if the connections use different terminals.
256
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
C.2.2
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Make a service port connection
CAUTION!
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not use a service port connection. Service port connections require opening the wiring compartment, and opening the wiring compartment while the transmitter is powered up could cause an explosion. To connect to the transmitter in a hazardous environment, use a connection method that does not require removing the transmitter housing cover.
Prerequisites
• ProLink III installed and licensed on your PC
• One of the following:
RS-232 to RS-485 signal converter
USB to RS-485 signal converter
• An available serial port or USB port
• Adapters as required (for example, 9-pin to 25-pin)
Procedure
1.
Attach the signal converter to the serial port or USB port on your PC.
2.
Access the service port terminals: a. Remove the transmitter end-cap to access the wiring compartment.
b. Loosen the screw on the Warning flap and open the power supply compartment.
3.
Connect the leads from the signal converter to the service port, terminals 7 (RS-485/
A) and 8 (RS-485/B).
Tip
Usually, but not always, the black lead is RS-485/A and the red lead is RS-485/B.
Configuration and Use Manual
257
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Figure C-1: Connection to service port
A
E
B C D
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C. Service port terminal 7 (RS-485/A)
D. Service port terminal 8 (RS-485/B)
E. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
4.
Start ProLink III.
5.
Choose Connect to Physical Device.
6.
Set Protocol to Service Port.
C.2.3
Tip
Service port connections use standard connection parameters and a standard address. You do not need to configure them here.
7.
Set the PC Port value to the PC COM port that you are using for this connection.
8.
Click Connect.
Need help?
If an error message appears:
• Switch the leads and try again.
• Ensure that you have specified the correct COM port.
• Check the physical connection between the PC and the transmitter.
Make a HART/Bell 202 connection
You can connect directly to the mA terminals on the transmitter, to any point in a local
HART loop, or to any point in a HART multidrop network.
258
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
CAUTION!
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not connect directly to the transmitter terminals.
Connecting directly to the transmitter terminals requires opening the wiring compartment, and opening the wiring compartment while the transmitter is powered up could cause an explosion. To connect to the transmitter in a hazardous environment, use a connection method that does not require opening the wiring compartment.
CAUTION!
If you connect directly to the mA terminals, the transmitter's mA output may be affected. If you are using the mA output for flow control, set devices for manual control before connecting directly to the mA terminals.
•
•
Prerequisites
•
•
ProLink III installed and licensed on your PC
One of the following:
RS-232 to Bell 202 signal converter
USB to Bell 202 signal converter
An available serial port or USB port
Adapters as required (for example, 9-pin to 25-pin)
Procedure
1.
Attach the signal converter to the serial port or USB port on your PC.
2.
To connect directly to the transmitter terminals: a. Remove the transmitter end-cap to access the wiring compartment.
b. Connect the leads from the signal converter to terminals 1 and 2.
Tip
HART connections are not polarity-sensitive. It does not matter which lead you attach to which terminal.
c. Add resistance as necessary.
Important
HART/Bell 202 connections require a voltage drop of 1 VDC. To achieve this, add resistance of 250–600
Ω to the connection.
Configuration and Use Manual
259
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Figure C-2: Connection to transmitter terminals
A
C
D
B
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C.
250–600
Ω
resistance
D. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
3.
To connect from a point in the local HART loop: a. Attach the leads from the signal converter to any point in the loop.
b. Add resistance as necessary.
Important
HART/Bell 202 connections require a voltage drop of 1 VDC. To achieve this, add resistance of
250–600
Ω to the connection.
260
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Figure C-3: Connection over local loop
E
A
D
R3
R2
C
R1
B
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C. Any combination of resistors R1, R2, and R3 as necessary to meet HART communication resistance requirements
D. DCS or PLC
E. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
4.
To connect over a HART multidrop network: a. Attach the leads from the signal converter to any point on the network.
b. Add resistance as necessary.
Important
HART/Bell 202 connections require a voltage drop of 1 VDC. To achieve this, add resistance of 250–600
Ω to the connection.
Configuration and Use Manual
261
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Figure C-4: Connection over multidrop network
D
B
A
C
A. Signal converter
B.
250–600
Ω
resistance
C. Devices on the network
D. Master device
5.
Start ProLink III.
6.
Choose Connect to Physical Device.
7.
Set Protocol to HART Bell 202.
Tip
HART/Bell 202 connections use standard connection parameters. You do not need to configure them here.
8.
If you are using a USB signal converter, enable Toggle RTS.
9.
Set Address/Tag to the HART polling address configured in the transmitter.
Tips
• If this is the first time you are connecting to the transmitter, use the default address: 0.
• If you are not in a HART multidrop environment, the HART polling address is typically left at the default value.
• If you are unsure of the transmitter’s address, click Poll. The program will search the network and return a list of the transmitters that it detects.
10.
Set the PC Port value to the PC COM port that you are using for this connection.
11.
Set Master as appropriate.
Option Description
Secondary Use this setting if another HART host such as a DCS is on the network.
262
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
C.2.4
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Option Description
Primary Use this setting if no other host is on the network. The Field Communicator is not a host.
12.
Click Connect.
Need help?
If an error message appears:
• Verify the HART address of the transmitter.
• Ensure that you have specified the correct COM port.
• Check the physical connection between the PC and the transmitter.
• Increase or decrease resistance.
• Ensure that there is no conflict with another HART master.
Make a HART/RS-485 connection
You can connect directly to the RS-485 terminals on the transmitter or to any point on the network.
CAUTION!
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not connect directly to the transmitter terminals.
Connecting directly to the transmitter terminals requires opening the wiring compartment, and opening the wiring compartment while the transmitter is powered up could cause an explosion. To connect to the transmitter in a hazardous environment, use a connection method that does not require opening the wiring compartment.
•
•
Prerequisites
•
•
ProLink III installed and licensed on your PC
One of the following:
RS-232 to RS-485 signal converter
USB to RS-485 signal converter
An available serial port or USB port
Adapters as required (for example, 9-pin to 25-pin)
Procedure
1.
Attach the signal converter to the serial port or USB port on your PC.
2.
To connect directly to the transmitter terminals: a. Remove the transmitter end-cap to access the wiring compartment.
b. Connect the leads from the signal converter to terminals 5 (RS-485/A) and 6
(RS-485/B).
Configuration and Use Manual
263
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Tip
HART connections are not polarity-sensitive. It does not matter which lead you attach to which terminal.
Figure C-5: Connection to transmitter terminals
C
A
B
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
3.
To connect over the RS-485 network: a. Attach the leads from the signal converter to any point on the network.
b. Add resistance as necessary.
264
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Figure C-6: Connection over network
A
D
E
C
B
A. PC
B. Adapter, if necessary
C. Signal converter
D. 120-
Ω
, 1/2-watt resistors at both ends of the segment, if necessary
E. DCS or PLC
F. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
4.
Start ProLink III.
5.
Choose Connect to Physical Device.
6.
Set the connection parameters to the values configured in the transmitter.
If your transmitter has not been configured, use the default values shown here.
Table C-1: Default HART/RS-485 connection parameters
Parameter
Protocol
Baud
Parity
Stop Bits
Address
Default values
HART
1200
Odd
1
0
Tip
If you do not know the transmitter’s RS-485 communication settings, you can connect through the service port, which always uses default settings, or use another communications tool to view or change the settings.
7.
Set the PC Port value to the PC COM port that you are using for this connection.
Configuration and Use Manual
265
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
C.2.5
266
8.
Set Master as appropriate.
Option Description
Secondary Use this setting if another HART host such as a DCS is on the network.
Primary
Use this setting if no other host is on the network. The Field Communicator is not a host.
9.
Click Connect.
Need help?
If an error message appears:
• Verify the HART address of the transmitter.
• Ensure that you have specified the correct COM port.
• Check the physical connection between the PC and the transmitter.
• Ensure that there is no conflict with another HART master.
• For long-distance communication, or if noise from an external source interferes with the signal, install 120-
Ω ½-W terminating resistors in parallel with the output at both ends of the communication segment.
Make a Modbus/RS-485 connection
You can connect directly to the RS-485 terminals on the transmitter or to any point on the network.
CAUTION!
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not connect directly to the transmitter terminals.
Connecting directly to the transmitter terminals requires opening the wiring compartment, and opening the wiring compartment while the transmitter is powered up could cause an explosion. To connect to the transmitter in a hazardous environment, use a connection method that does not require opening the wiring compartment.
•
•
Prerequisites
•
•
ProLink III installed and licensed on your PC
One of the following:
RS-232 to RS-485 signal converter
USB to RS-485 signal converter
An available serial port or USB port
Adapters as required (for example, 9-pin to 25-pin)
Procedure
1.
Attach the signal converter to the serial port or USB port on your PC.
2.
To connect directly to the transmitter terminals: a. Remove the transmitter end-cap to access the wiring compartment.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
b. Connect the leads from the signal converter to terminals 5 (RS-485/A) and 6
(RS-485/B).
Tip
Usually, but not always, the black lead is RS-485/A and the red lead is RS-485/B.
Figure C-7: Connection to transmitter terminals
C
A
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
B
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
3.
To connect over the RS-485 network: a. Attach the leads from the signal converter to any point on the network.
b. Add resistance as necessary.
Configuration and Use Manual
267
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Figure C-8: Connection over network
A
D
E
C
B
A. PC
B. Signal converter
C. 120-
Ω
, 1/2-watt resistors at both ends of the segment, if necessary
D. DCS or PLC
E. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
Note
This figure shows a serial port connection. USB connections are also supported.
4.
Start ProLink III.
5.
Choose Connect to Physical Device.
6.
Set the connection parameters to the values configured in the transmitter.
If your transmitter has not been configured, use the default values shown here.
Table C-2: Default Modbus/RS-485 connection parameters
Parameter
Protocol
Baud
Parity
Stop Bits
Address
Default value
Modbus RTU
9600
Odd
1
1
268
Tip
If you do not know the transmitter’s RS-485 communication settings, you can connect through the service port, which always uses default settings, or use another communications tool to view or change the settings.
7.
Set the PC Port value to the PC COM port that you are using for this connection.
8.
Click Connect.
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Need help?
If an error message appears:
• Verify the Modbus address of the transmitter.
• Ensure that you have specified the correct COM port.
• Check the physical connection between the PC and the transmitter.
• Increase or decrease resistance.
• For long-distance communication, or if noise from an external source interferes with the signal, install 120-
Ω ½-W terminating resistors in parallel with the output at both ends of the communication segment.
• Ensure that there is no concurrent Modbus communication to the transmitter.
C.3
Menu maps for ProLink III
Figure C-9: Device Tools: Main
Configuration and Use Manual
269
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Figure C-10: Configuration: Process Measurement
Figure C-11: Configuration: I/O
270
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Figure C-12: Configuration: Events
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Figure C-13: Configuration: Communications
Configuration and Use Manual
271
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Figure C-14: Configuration: Informational Parameters
Figure C-15: Device Tools: Calibration
272
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Figure C-16: Calibration: Density Calibration
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Figure C-17: Calibration: Temperature Calibration
Configuration and Use Manual
273
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Figure C-18: Device Tools: Configuration Transfer
Figure C-19: Diagnostics: Testing
274
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Figure C-20: Diagnostics: Meter Verification
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Figure C-21: Device Tools: Trending
Configuration and Use Manual
275
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
276
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Appendix D
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Topics covered in this appendix:
•
Basic information about the Field Communicator
•
Connect with the Field Communicator
•
Menu maps for the Field Communicator
D.1
Basic information about the
Field Communicator
The Field Communicator is a handheld configuration and management tool that can be used with a variety of devices, including Micro Motion transmitters. It provides complete access to transmitter functions and data.
Field Communicator documentation
Most of the instructions in this manual assume that you are already familiar with the
Field Communicator and can perform the following tasks:
• Turn on the Field Communicator
• Navigate the Field Communicator menus
• Establish communication with HART-compatible devices
• Send configuration data to the device
• Use the alpha keys to enter information
If you are unable to perform these tasks, consult the Field Communicator manual before attempting to use the Field Communicator. The Field Communicator manual is available on the Micro Motion documentation CD or the Micro Motion web site
( www.micromotion.com
).
Device descriptions (DDs)
In order for the Field Communicator to work with your device, the appropriate device description (DD) must be installed. The Model 1700 transmitter requires the following
HART device description: 1000 Mass flo, Dev v6, DD v4.
To view the device descriptions that are installed on your Field Communicator:
1.
At the HART application menu, press Utility > Available Device Descriptions.
2.
Scroll the list of manufacturers and select Micro Motion, then scroll the list of installed device descriptions.
Configuration and Use Manual
277
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
D.2
If Micro Motion is not listed, or you do not see the required device description, use the
Field Communicator Easy Upgrade Utility to install the device description, or contact
Micro Motion.
Field Communicator menus and messages
Many of the menus in this manual start with the On-Line menu. Ensure that you are able to navigate to the On-Line menu.
As you use the Field Communicator with a Micro Motion transmitter, you will see a number of messages and notes. This manual does not document all of these messages and notes.
Important
The user is responsible for responding to messages and notes and complying with all safety messages.
Connect with the Field Communicator
A connection from the Field Communicator to your transmitter allows you to read process data, configure the transmitter, and perform maintenance and troubleshooting tasks.
You can connect the Field Communicator to the mA terminals on the transmitter, to any point in a local HART loop, or to any point in a HART multidrop network.
CAUTION!
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not connect the Field Communicator to the mA terminals on the transmitter. This connection requires opening the wiring compartment, and opening the wiring compartment in a hazardous area can cause an explosion.
Prerequisites
The following HART device description (DD) must be installed on the Field Communicator:
1000 Mass flo, Dev v6, DD v4.
Procedure
1.
To connect to the transmitter terminals: a. Remove the cover from the wiring compartment.
b. Attach the leads from the Field Communicator to terminals 1 and 2 on the transmitter and add resistance as required.
The Field Communicator must be connected across a resistance of
250–600
Ω.
Tip
HART connections are not polarity-sensitive. It does not matter which lead you attach to which terminal.
278
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Figure D-1: Field Communicator connection to transmitter terminals
B
A
C
A. Field Communicator
B.
250–600
Ω
resistance
C. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
2.
To connect to a point in the local HART loop, attach the leads from the
Field Communicator to any point in the loop and add resistance as necessary.
The Field Communicator must be connected across a resistance of
250–600
Ω.
Figure D-2: Field Communicator connection to local HART loop
C
B
A
A. Field Communicator
B.
250–600
Ω
resistance
C. Transmitter, with wiring compartment and power supply compartment opened
3.
To connect to a point in the HART multidrop network, attach the leads from the
Field Communicator to any point on the network..
Configuration and Use Manual
279
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Figure D-3: Field Communicator connection to multidrop network
D
B
D.3
C
A. Field Communicator
B.
250–600
Ω
resistance
C. Devices on the network
D. Master device
A
4.
Turn on the Field Communicator and wait until the main menu is displayed.
5.
If you are connecting across a multidrop network: a. Set the Field Communicator to poll.
The device returns all valid addresses.
b. Enter the HART address of the transmitter.
The default HART address is 0. However, in a multidrop network, the HART address has probably been set to a different, unique value.
Postrequisites
To navigate to the Online menu, choose HART Application > Online. Most configuration, maintenance, and troubleshooting tasks are performed from the Online menu.
Tip
You may see messages related to the DD or active alerts. Press the appropriate buttons to ignore the message and continue.
Menu maps for the Field Communicator
280
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Figure D-4: On-Line menu
On-Line Menu
1
Overview
1 Check Status
2 Primary Purpose Variables
3 Shortcuts
2
Configure
1 Manual Setup
2 Alert Setup
3
Service Tools
1 Alerts
2 Variables
3 Trends
4 Maintenance
5 Simulate
Configuration and Use Manual
281
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Figure D-5: Overview menu
1
2
Check Status
1 Refresh Alerts
2 Dev Status:
3 Comm Status:
Primary Purpose Variables
Mass Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate
Density
On-Line Menu >
1 Overview
3
Shortcuts
1 Device Information
2 Totalizer Control
3 Zero Calibration
4 Variables
5 Trends
6 Meter Verification *
1
Device Information
1 Identification
2 Revisions
3 Mat. of Construction
4 Licenses
* Displayed only if meter verification is enabled.
1
2
Identification
1 Tag
2 Model
3 Xmtr Serial Num
4 Sensor Serial Num
5 Date
6 Descriptor
7 Message
Revisions
1 Universal
2 Field Device
3 DD Revision
4 Transmitter Software
5 CP Software
6 ETO Number
3
Mat. of Construction
1 Tube Wetted Mat.
2 Tube Lining
3 Sensor Flange
282
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Figure D-6: Configure menu
On-Line Menu >
1 Configure
1
Manual Setup
1 Characterize
2 Measurements
3 Display
4 Inputs/Outputs
5 Info Parameters
2
Alert Setup
1 I/O Fault Actions
2 Alert Severity
3 Discrete Events
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Configuration and Use Manual
283
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Figure D-7: Manual Setup menu
On-Line Menu >
2 Configure >
1 Manual Setup
1
Characterize
1 Sensor Type
2 Sensor Tag Parameters
2
Measurements
1 Flow
2 Density
3 Temperature
4 Update Rate
5 LD Optimization
6 Special Units
7 External Pressure/Temperature
8 GSV
3
Display
1 Language
2 Display Variable Menu Features
3 Offline Variable Menu Features
4 Backlight
5 Display Variables
6 Decimal Places
4
Inputs/Outputs
1 Channels
2 mA Output
3 Frequency Output
4 Discrete Output
5 Communications
6 Variable Mapping
5
Communications
1 HART Address
2 Tag
3 Device Identification
4 Dev ID (CP)
5 Set Up Burst Mode
6 mA Output Mode
7 Set Up RS-485 Port
5
Info Parameters
1 Transmitter Info
2 Sensor Information
1
Transmitter Info
1 Tag
2 Xmtr Serial Num
3 Message
4 Descriptor
5 Date
6 Write Protect
2
Sensor Information
1 Sensor Type
2 Sensor Serial Num
3 Tube Wetted Mat.
4 Tube Lining
5 Sensor Flange
284
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Figure D-8: Manual Setup menu: Characterize
On-Line Menu >
2 Configure >
1 Manual Setup >
1 Characterize
1
Sensor Type
1 Curved Tube
2 Straight Tube
2
Curved Tube Sensor Type Straight Tube
Sensor Tag Parameters
1 FlowCal
2 D1
3 D2
4 TC
5 K1
6 K2
7 FD
Sensor Tag Parameters
1 Flow Parameters
2 Density Parameters
1
Flow Parameters
1 Flow FCF
2 FTG
3 FFQ
2
Density Parameters
1 D1
2 D2
3 DT
4 DTG
5 K1
6 K2
7 FD
8 DFQ1
9 DFQ2
Configuration and Use Manual
285
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Figure D-9: Manual Setup menu: Measurements
On-Line Menu >
2 Configure >
1 Manual Setup >
2 Measurements
1
Flow
1 Flow Direction
2 Flow Damping
3 Mass Flow Unit
4 Mass Flow Cutoff
5 Volume Flow Unit *
6 Volume Flow Cutoff *
7 Mass Factor
8 Volume Factor
2
Density
1 Density Unit
2 Density Damping
3 Density Cutoff *
4 Density Factor
5 Slug Duration
6 Slug Low Limit
7 Slug High Limit
6
3
4
Temperature
1 Temperature Unit
2 Temp Damping
Update Rate
1 Update Rate
2 100 Hz Variable
Special Units
1 Mass Special Units
2 Volume Special Units
* Displayed only if Volume Flow Type =
Liquid. Menu numbers are adjusted as required.
7
External Pressure/Temperature
1 Pressure
2 Temperature
3 External Polling
1
Pressure
1 Pressure Unit
2 Pressure Compensation
3 Compensation Pressure
4 Flow Cal Pressure
5 Flow Press Factor
6 Dens Press Factor
2
Temperature
1 Temperature Unit
2 External Temperature
3 Correction Temperature
3
External Polling
1 Poll Control
2 Ext Dev Tag 1
3 Polled Variable 1
4 Ext Dev Tag 2
5 Polled Variable 2
8
GSV
1 Volume Flow Type
2 Gas Ref Density
3 GSV Cutoff
4 GSV Flow Unit
286
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Figure D-10: Manual Setup menu: Display
On-Line Menu >
2 Configure >
1 Manual Setup >
3 Display
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
1
2
3
Language
English
German
French
Spanish
Display Variable Menu
Features
1 Totalizer Reset
2 Start/Stop Totals
3 Auto Scroll
4 Scroll Time *
5 Refresh Rate
6 Status LED Blinking
Offline Variable Menu
Features
1 Offline Menu
2 Alert Menu
3 Acknowledge All
4 Offline Passcode
5 Alert Passcode
6 Offline Passcode
4
5
Backlight
1 Control
2 Intensity (0-63)
Display Variables
1 Display Variables (1-5)
2 Display Variables (6-10)
3 Display Variables (11-15)
6
Decimal Places
1 For Process Variables
2 For Totalizer Variables
3 For Diagnostic Variables
* Displayed only if Auto Scroll is enabled. Menu numbers are adjusted as required.
Configuration and Use Manual
287
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Figure D-11: Manual Setup menu: I/O
On-Line Menu >
2 Configure >
1 Manual Setup >
4 Inputs/Outputs
1
Channels
1 Channel A
2 Channel B
3 Channel C
3
Additional options
Frequency Output
1 FO Settings
2 FO Fault Parameters
3 FO Scaling
2
Channel B
1 Frequency Output
2 Discrete Output
2
mA Output
1 Primary Variable
2 mA Output Settings
3 mA Fault Settings
2
mA Output Settings
1 PV LRV
2 PV URV
3 PV Min Span
4 PV LSL
5 PV USL
6 PV MAO Cutoff
7 PV Added Damping
3
mA Fault Settings
1 mAO Fault Action
2 mAO Fault Level
1
FO Settings
1 Third Variable
2 Max Pulse Width
3 FO Polarity
2
FO Fault Parameters
1 Third Variable
2 FO Fault Action
3 FO Fault Level
3
FO Scaling *
1 FO Scaling Method
2 TV Frequency Factor
3 TV Rate Factor
3 Set FO Scaling
* Options vary depending on FO Scaling Method.
288
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Figure D-12: Manual Setup menu: I/O (continued)
On-Line Menu >
2 Configure >
1 Manual Setup >
4 Inputs/Outputs
5
4
Discrete Output
1 DO Assignment
2 DO Polarity
3 DO Fault Action
4 Flow Switch Source
5 Flow Switch Setpoint
6 Hysteresis (0.1-10.0)
Communications
1 HART Address
2 Tag
3 Device Identification
4 Dev ID (CP)
5 Set Up Burst Mode
6 mA Output Mode
7 Set Up RS-485 Port
5
Set Up Burst Mode
1 Burst Mode
2 Burst Option
3 Field Device Var 1
4 Field Device Var 2
5 Field Device Var 3
6 Field Device Var 4
7
Set Up RS-485 Port
1 Protocol
2 Baud Rate
3 Parity
4 Stop Bits
5 Modbus Slave Address
6
Variable Mapping
1 Primary Variable
2 Secondary Variable
3 Third Variable
4 Fourth Variable
Configuration and Use Manual
289
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Figure D-13: Alert Setup menu
1
I/O Fault Actions
1 mAO Fault Action
2 mAO Fault Level
3 FO Fault Action
4 FO Fault Level
5 Comm Fault Action
2
Alert Severity
1 Fault Timeout
2 Set Alert Severity
3 View Alert Severity
On-Line Menu >
2 Configure >
2 Alert Setup
3
Discrete Events
1 Discrete Event 1
2 Discrete Event 2
3 Discrete Event 3
4 Discrete Event 4
5 Discrete Event 5
6 Assign Discrete Action
7 Read Discrete Action
8 Review Discrete Actions
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Discrete Event x
1 Discrete Event Var
2 Discrete Event Type
3 Setpoint A
4 Setpoint B
290
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Figure D-14: Service Tools menu
On-Line Menu >
3 Service Tools
1
Alerts
1 Refresh Alerts
Alert Name
Additional Information for Above
2
Variables
1 Variable Summary
2 Process Variables
3 Mapped Variables
4 External Variables
5 Totalizer Control
6 Outputs
3
Trends
1 Process Variables
2 Diagnostic Variables
4
Maintenance
1 Routine Maintenance
2 Zero Calibration
3 Density Calibration
4 Temperature Calibration
5 Diagnostic Variables
6 Modbus Data
5
Simulate
1 Simulate Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
291
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Figure D-15: Service Tools menu: Variables
On-Line Menu >
3 Service Tools >
2 Variables
1
2
Variable Summary
Mass Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate
Density
Process Variables
1 Mass Flow Rate
2 Volume Flow Rate *
3 Density
4 Temperature
3
4
Mapped Variables
1 PV Mass Flow Rate
2 SV Mass Flow Rate
3 TV Mass Flow Rate
4 QV Mass Flow Rate
External Variables
1 External Temperature
2 External Pressure
* If Volume Flow Type = GSV,
GSV variables are displayed.
6
5
Totalizer Control
1 All Totalizers
2 Mass
3 Volume *
1
2
All Totalizers
1 Start Totalizers
2 Stop Totalizers
3 Reset All Totals
4 Mass Total
5 Volume Total *
Mass
1 Mass Flow Rate
2 Mass Total
3 Mass Inventory
4 Reset Total
3
Volume *
1 Volume Flow Rate
2 Volume Total
3 Volume Inventory
4 Reset Total
Outputs
1 mA Output
2 Frequency Output/
DO State
1
2
mA Output
1 Present MAO Gauge
2 PV MAO
3 PV % Range
Frequency Output
1 Present Freq Gauge
2 Present Freq Output
292
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Figure D-16: Service Tools menu: Maintenance
On-Line Menu >
3 Service Tools >
4 Maintenance
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
1
Routine Maintenance
1 Trim mA Output
2 Meter Verification *
2
Meter Verification **
1 Run Meter Verification
2 View Test Results
3 Schedule Meter
Verification
2
Zero Calibration
1 Mass Flow Rate
2 Volume Flow Rate
3 Zero Time
4 Zero Value
5 Standard Deviation
6 Perform Auto Zero
7 Restore Factory Zero
3
Density Calibration
1 Mass Flow Rate
2 Density
3 Dens Pt1 (Air)
4 Dens Pt2 (Water)
5 Dens Pt3 T-Series
6 Dens Pt4 T-Series
7 Flowing Dens (FD)
4
Temperature Calibration
1 Temperature
2 Temp Cal Factor
5
Diagnostic Variables
1 Sensor Model
2 Drive Gain
3 LPO Amplitude
4 RPO Amplitude
5 Tube Frequency
6 Live Zero
7 Fld Verification Zero
8 Additional
8
Additional
1 Core Processor Input
Voltage
2 Board Temperature
3 Power On Time
6
Modbus Data
1 Read Modbus Data
2 Write Modbus Data
* Displayed only if meter verification is enabled.
** Displayed only if Smart Meter
Verification is enabled. For earlier versions, the Meter Verification
Method is launched.
Configuration and Use Manual
293
Using the Field Communicator with the transmitter
Figure D-17: Service Tools menu: Simulate
On-Line Menu >
3 Service Tools >
5 Simulate
1
Simulate Outputs
1 mA Output Loop Test
2 Frequency Output Test/
Discrete Output Test *
2
Simulate Sensor
1 Simulate Primary Purpose Variables
2 Mass Flow Rate
3 Density
4 Temperature
* Options vary depending on Channel settings.
294
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Default values and ranges
Appendix E
Default values and ranges
E.1
Default values and ranges
The default values and ranges represent the typical factory transmitter configuration.
Depending on how the transmitter was ordered, certain values may have been configured at the factory and are not represented in the default values and ranges.
Table E-1: Transmitter default values and ranges
Type
Flow
Parameter
Flow direction
Flow damping
Default
Forward
0.8 sec
(1)
Range Comments
Flow calibration factor 1.00005.13
0.0 – 60.0 sec User-entered value is corrected to nearest lower value in list of preset values. In Special mode, the preset values are 1/5 normal. For gas applications,
Micro Motion recommends a minimum value of 2.56.
For T-Series sensors, this value represents the FCF and FT factors concatenated.
Mass flow units
Mass flow cutoff g/s
0.0 g/s Recommended setting is 5% of the sensor’s rated maximum flowrate.
Volume flow type
Volume flow units
Volume flow cutoff
Liquid
L/s
0/0 L/s 0.0 – x L/s x is obtained by multiplying the flow calibration factor by 0.2, using units of L/s.
Meter factors Mass factor
Density factor
Volume factor
Density Density damping
1
1
1
1.6 sec 0.0 – 60.0 sec User-entered value is corrected to nearest value in list of preset values.
(1) In Special mode, the default value is 0.64 sec.
Configuration and Use Manual
295
Default values and ranges
Table E-1: Transmitter default values and ranges
(continued)
Type
D1
D2
K1
Parameter
Density units
Density cutoff
Default
g/cm
3
0.2 g/cm
3
0 g/cm
3
1 g/cm
3
1000 µsec
K2 50,000 µsec
Range
0.0 – 0.5 g/cm
3
1000 – 50,000
µsec
1000 – 50,000
µsec
Slug flow
FD
Temp Coefficient
Slug flow low limit
0
4.44
0.0 g/cm
3
Slug flow high limit
Slug duration
Temperature Temperature damping
5.0 g/cm
3
0.0 sec
4.8 sec
0.0 – 10.0 g/ cm
3
0. 0 – 10.0 g/ cm
3
0.0 – 60.0 sec
0.0 – 80 sec
Comments
User-entered value is corrected to nearest lower value in list of preset values.
Pressure
T-Series sensor D3
D4
K3
Special units
Temperature units Deg C
Temperature calibration factor 1.00000T0.00
00
Pressure units PSI
Flow factor
Density factor
Cal pressure
K4
FTG
FFQ
DTG
DFQ1
DFQ2
Base mass unit
Base mass time
Mass flow conversion factor
Base volume unit
0
0
0
0 g/cm
3
0 g/cm
3
0 µsec
0 µsec
0
0
0
0
0 g sec
1
L
296
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Default values and ranges
Table E-1: Transmitter default values and ranges
(continued)
Type
Variable mapping mA output 1 mA output 2
Parameter
Base volume time
Volume flow conversion factor
Primary variable
Secondary variable
Tertiary variable
Quaternary variable
Primary variable
LRV
URV
AO cutoff
AO added damping
LSL
USL
MinSpan
Fault action
AO fault level – downscale
AO fault level – upscale
Last measured value timeout
Secondary variable
LRV
URV
AO cutoff
AO added damping
LSL
USL
MinSpan
Default
sec
1
Mass flow
Density
Mass flow
Volume flow
Mass flow
–200.00000 g/ s
200.00000 g/s
0.00000 g/s
0.00000 sec
–200 g/s
Range Comments
200 g/s
0.3 g/s
Downscale
2.0 mA
22 mA
0.00 sec
Density
0.00 g/cm3
10.00 g/cm3
Not-A-Number
0.00000 sec
0.00 g/cm
3
1.0 – 3.6 mA
21.0 – 24.0 mA
10.00 g/cm
0.05 g/cm
3
3
Read-only.
LSL is calculated based on the sensor size and characterization parameters.
Read only.
USL is calculated based on the sensor size and characterization parameters.
Read-only.
Read-only.
LSL is calculated based on the sensor size and characterization parameters.
Read only.
USL is calculated based on the sensor size and characterization parameters.
Read-only.
Configuration and Use Manual
297
Default values and ranges
Table E-1: Transmitter default values and ranges
(continued)
Type
LRV
URV
Frequency output
Parameter
Fault action
AO fault level – downscale
AO fault level – upscale
Last measured value timeout
Mass flow rate
Volume flow rate
Density
Temperature
Drive gain
Gas standard volume flow rate
External temperature
External pressure
Mass flow rate
Volume flow rate
Density
Temperature
Drive gain
Gas standard volume flow rate
External temperature
External pressure
Tertiary variable
Frequency factor
Default
Downscale
2.0 mA
22 mA
0.00 sec
−200.000 g/s
−0.200 l/s
0.000 g/cm
3
−240.000 °C
0.000%
−423.78SCFM
−240.000 °C
0.000 psi
200.000 g/s
0.200 l/s
10.000 g/cm
3
450.000 °C
100.000%
423.78SCFM
450.000 °C
100.000 psi
Mass flow
1,000.00 Hz
Range
1.0 – 3.6 mA
21.0 – 24.0 mA
0.001 – 10,000
Hz
Flow rate factor
Frequency pulse width
1000 kg/min
277.0 ms 0 or 0.5 –
277.5 ms
Scaling method
Frequency fault action
Frequency fault level – upscale
Freq=Flow
Downscale
15,000 Hz 10.0 – 15,000
Hz
Discrete output
Frequency output polarity
Last measured value timeout
Source
Fault Indicator
Power
Polarity
Active high
0.0 seconds
Flow direction
None
Internal
Active high
0.0 – 60.0 sec
Comments
298
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Table E-1: Transmitter default values and ranges
(continued)
Type
Polarity
Display
Digital communications
Parameter
Active low
Backlight on/off
Backlight intensity
Refresh rate
Variable 1
Variable 2
Variable 3
Default
Variable 4
Variable 5
Variable 6
Variable 7
Variable 8–15
Display totalizer start/stop
Display totalizer reset
Display auto scroll
Drive gain
None
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Display offline menu
Display offline password
Display alarm menu
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Display acknowledge all alarms Enabled
Offline password 1234
Auto scroll rate 10 sec
Fault action
Fault timeout
None
0 seconds
Modbus address
Modbus ASCII support
Floating-point byte order
1
Enabled
3–4–1–2
On
63
200 milliseconds
Mass flow rate
Mass total
Volume flow rate
Volume total
Density
Temperature
Range
0 – 63
100 – 10,000 milliseconds
0.0 – 60.0 sec
Comments
Default values and ranges
Configuration and Use Manual
299
Default values and ranges
300
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Transmitter components and installation wiring
Appendix F
Transmitter components and installation wiring
Topics covered in this appendix:
•
Installation types
•
Power supply terminals and ground
•
Input/output (I/O) wiring terminals
F.1
Installation types
Model 1700 and Model 2700 transmitters can be installed five different ways, only one of which applies to your specific installation.
• Integral – The transmitter is mounted directly on the sensor. You do not need to install the transmitter separately, but you will need to connect power supply and I/O wiring.
Figure F-1: Integral installation
Transmitter
Sensor
• High-temperature flexible conduit – Some high-temperature meters come preinstalled with a flexible conduit between the sensor and the transmitter. You do not have to connect any wires between the transmitter and the sensor, but you do need to mount the electronics separately and connect power and I/O wiring to the transmitter.
Configuration and Use Manual
301
Transmitter components and installation wiring
Figure F-2: High-temperature flexible conduit installation
302
High-temperature flexible conduit installations use the same installation instructions as 4-wire remote installations, except that the distance between the sensor and the electronics is limited by the length of the flexible conduit.
• 4-wire remote – The transmitter is installed remotely from the sensor. You need to mount the transmitter separately from the sensor, connect a 4-wire cable between the transmitter and sensor, and connect power and I/O wiring to the transmitter.
Figure F-3: 4-wire remote installation – painted aluminum housing
Transmitter
Core processor
4-wire cable
Sensor
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Transmitter components and installation wiring
Figure F-4: 4-wire remote installation – stainless steel housing
Transmitter
Core processor
4-wire cable
Sensor
• 9-wire remote – The transmitter and core processor are combined in a single unit that is installed remotely from the sensor. You need to mount the transmitter/core processor assembly separately from the sensor, connect a 9-wire cable between the transmitter/core processor, and connect power and I/O wiring to the transmitter.
Configuration and Use Manual
303
Transmitter components and installation wiring
Figure F-5: 9-wire remote installation type
Transmitter
Junction box
9-wire cable
Sensor
• Remote core processor with remote sensor – A remote core process with remote sensor installation separates all three components – transmitter, core processor, and sensor – all of which are installed separately. A 4-wire cable connects the transmitter to the core processor, and a 9-wire cable connects the core processor to the sensor.
304
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
F.2
Transmitter components and installation wiring
Figure F-6: Remote core processor with remote sensor installation type
Transmitter
4-wire cable
Core processor
Junction box
Sensor
Power supply terminals and ground
Figure F-7: Power supply wiring terminals
9-wire cable
C
A
A.
B.
C.
Warning flap
Equipment ground
Power supply wiring terminals (9 and 10)
B
Configuration and Use Manual
305
Transmitter components and installation wiring
F.3
Input/output (I/O) wiring terminals
Figure F-8: I/O wiring terminals
A
B
C
A.
B.
C.
mA/HART
Frequency output or discrete output
RS-485
306
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
NE 53 history
Appendix G
NE 53 history
G.1
NE 53 history
Date
08/2000
Version
1.x
05/2001 2.x
Type
Expansion
Adjustment
Feature
Expansion
12/2001 3.x
Adjustment
Feature
Expansion
Change
Added writing of the device tag using Modbus
Improved communication handling with the
HART Tri-Loop product
Indication of outputs option board type appears on display at power-up
Added alarm A106 to indicate that HART burst mode is enabled
Added access to the transmitter in fault status bit via Modbus
Control of HART burst mode now available via
Modbus
Added support for the Model 1700 transmitter
Added support for the I.S. (intrinsically safe) transmitter option
Added support to configure the process variable units for mass flow, volume flow, density and temperature from the display
Added support for assigning process variables to the mA and frequency output from the display
Clarified the interaction of the digital fault setting and the fault timeout (last measured value timeout)
Drive gain can be assigned to mA output
Pressure compensation added via HART
Channel B can be configured as a discrete output
Added support for the configurable I/O option board
Software version information available via the display or Modbus
Configurable density cutoff
Additional HART variables can be assigned to QV
Operating instruction
3600204 A
3600204 B
3600647 A
3600647 B
3600785 A
20000325 A
20000325 B
20000150 A
20000150 B
20000148 A
Configuration and Use Manual
307
NE 53 history
Date
06/2003
Version
4.x
Type
Adjustment
Feature
Expansion
Adjustment
Feature
Change
The display start/stop totalizers function can be enabled or disabled
Petroleum measurement application improvements
Live zero available as display variable
Increased options for fault output settings
New cryogenic application temperature algorithms
Improved frequency output stability and unit conversions
Improved the handling of volume flow rate when slug flow is detected
Improved handling of density values and calibrations during fault conditions
Display configuration, screen flow and optical switch changes
HART communication and burst mode improvements
Petroleum measurement application added
Custody transfer option added to Configurable I/
O option board
Operating instruction
HART polling for external pressure/temperature added
Added support for the Model 1500 transmitter 20000325 C
Additional variables displayed by the
Model 1700 transmitter
20000150 C
3600647 C
Improved the handling of certain alarm conditions
20000148 B
20001715 A
Clarified the behavior of certain Modbus calibration coils
Clarified the interaction between certain density measurement units and density cutoff values
Improved the handling of the mA source setting via the display
Improvements to pressure and temperature polling
HART Tri-Loop and other communication improvements
Clarified the value returned by Modbus scaled integer registers during a fault condition
Discrete values now available through Modbus
308
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
NE 53 history
Date
09/2006
Version
5.x
09/2009 6.x
Type
Expansion
Adjustment
Feature
Expansion
Change
Discrete output assignable as a flow switch
Discrete output fault indication configurability
Discrete input support for multiple action assignments
Added support for querying the display LED status via Modbus
Additional HART and Modbus commands
Process comparator expanded to five configurable events
Factory configuration restore function
Factory zero restore function
Alarm history expanded
Selectable write protection for configuration data
Expanded selection of source assignments for mA output
Expanded storage of mA range values
Expanded custody transfer application for independent implementation of NTEP and OIML compliance
Display improvements for floating-point data
Configurable alarm severity
Gas standard volume functionality
Meter verification availability as an option
Multiple display language selections
Frequency output configurable as discrete output on Series 1000 transmitters
Discrete output assignable as flow switch on
Series 1000 transmitters
Display Variable 1 optionally fixed to process variable assigned to primary mA output
Frequency output scaling method and related parameters configurable from display
For enhanced density and petroeum measurement process variables, display cycles among variable name, current value and unit, and reference temperature
Operating instruction
20001715 B
20001715 BA
Configuration and Use Manual
309
NE 53 history
Date Version Type
Adjustment
Feature
Change
The following combinations are not allowed:
• mA Output Fault Action = None and Digital
Communications Fault Action = NAN
• Frequency Output Fault Action = None and
Digital Communications Fault Action = NAN
Display variables set to a volume process variable automatically switch between liquid and
GSV, according to current setting of Volume
Flow Type
Configurable hysteresis for flow switch
Field Verification Zero added to support Weights
& Measures application
Transmitter firmware checksum and core processor firmware checksum assignable as display variables and viewable in ProLink II
Operating instruction
310
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Index
Index
A
Added Damping
Additional Communications Response Delay
address
Modbus address
air calibration, See calibration, density
alarms
configuring alarm handling
Status Alarm Severity
viewing and acknowledging using ProLink II
using the display
AO Cutoff
Auto Scroll
B
C
Calculation Speed
calibration
density D1 and D2
using ProLink II
density D3 and D4
using ProLink II
temperature
Configuration and Use Manual
calibration parameters, See characterizing
calibration pressure, See pressure compensation
characterizing density parameters
flow calibration parameters
parameters on sensor tags
communications, See digital communications
configuration backing up
channel
density measurement
digital communications
discrete outputs
display
events basic
frequency outputs
gas standard volume flow measurement
mA outputs
mass flow measurement
pressure compensation, See pressure compensation
response times
restore factory configuration using ProLink II
volume flow measurement
write-protection
connection
ProLink II types
ProLink III types
customer service contacting
cutoffs
AO cutoff
311
Index
interaction between AO Cutoff and process variable
mass flow
D
damping
Added Damping
flow damping
interaction between Added Damping and process variable damping
temperature damping
DD, See HART device description (DD)
decimal notation, See display, decimal notation decimal values entering from display
precision of display variables
density
density calibration, See calibration, density
density factor, See pressure compensation
density measurement
cutoff
50 effect on volume measurement
damping
interaction with added damping
measurement units
meter factor
slug flow
Descriptor
device description (DD), See HART device description
(DD) diagnostics loop testing using ProLink II
using the display
sensor simulation
digital communications configuring HART/Bell 202 parameters
configuring HART/RS-485 parameters
configuring Modbus/RS-485 parameters
Digital Communications Fault Action
Digital Communications Fault Action
discrete outputs
Fault Action
loop testing using ProLink II
using the display
polarity
source
display accessing menu system
components
configuring display behavior
Auto Scroll
backlight
display precision
configuring security
decimal notation
enabling or disabling operator actions acknowledging all alarms
312
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Index resetting totalizers
starting and stopping totalizers
menu codes
process variable codes
drive gain collecting data
E
electrical shorts
entrained gas, See density measurement, slug flow events
Enhanced Event Action
exponential notation, See display, exponential notation
F
Fault Action
digital communications
discrete outputs
frequency outputs
mA outputs
Fault Timeout
Field Communicator connecting to the transmitter
Floating-Point Byte Order
floating-point values, See display, floating-point values flow damping
27 interaction with added damping
flow direction
Flow Direction
effect on digital communications
effect on discrete outputs
effect on frequency outputs
effect on mA outputs
effect on totalizers and inventories
flow factor, See pressure compensation
Frequency Factor
frequency outputs
Fault Action
loop testing using ProLink II
using the display
maximum pulse width
polarity
scaling method
Frequency = Flow
G
gas standard volume flow measurement
cutoff
effect of flow damping on
effect of mass flow cutoff on
measurement units
ground
grounding
GSV, See gas standard volume flow measurement
Configuration and Use Manual
313
Index
H
HART address
HART/Bell 202
Field Communicator connections
HART/RS-485
variables
interaction with transmitter outputs
hysteresis
I
installation types
4-wire remote
9-wire remote
high-temperature flexible conduit
integral
301 remote core processor with remote transmitter
inventories
L
language for display
Last Measured Value Timeout, See Fault Timeout
LD Optimization
Local Operator Interface (LOI), See display
loop testing using ProLink II
using the display
Lower Range Value (LRV)
M
mA outputs
Added Damping
interaction with density damping
AO cutoff
interaction with volume flow cutoff
Fault Action
loop testing using ProLink II
using the display
Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value
process variable
mass flow measurement
cutoff
flow damping
measurement units
meter factor
measurement units density
gas standard volume flow rate
special unit
mass flow rate
special unit
314
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Index pressure
temperature
volume flow rate
special unit
menu maps display
ProLink III
Message
meter factors, See meter validation
meter validation
alternate method for volume flow
standard method
meter verification, See Smart Meter Verification
Modbus
Additional Communications Response Delay
address
configuring Modbus/RS-485 digital communications
Floating-Point Byte Order
model code
O
P
password
pickoffs collecting data
polarity discrete outputs
frequency outputs
polling pressure using ProLink II
polling address, See HART address power power up
power supply wiring
pressure compensation configuring using ProLink II
pressure measurement units
primary variable (PV)
process measurement effect of Calculation Speed
effect of Update Rate
process variables
See also gas standard volume flow measurement
See also mass flow measurement
See also temperature measurement
See also volume flow measurement
codes used on the display
ProLink II connecting
HART/Bell 202
Modbus/RS-485
service port
connection types
requirements
ProLink III connecting
HART/Bell 202
Modbus/RS-485
service port
connection types
256 connnecting to the transmitter
requirements
pulse width
Configuration and Use Manual
315
Index
Q
R
radio frequency interference (RFI)
Rate Factor
reference density, See standard density
refresh rate display
Response Time
S
safety messages
scaling frequency outputs
mA outputs
secondary variable (SV)
security
sensor coils
Sensor Liner Material
Sensor Material
sensor simulation
using ProLink II
113 using the Field Communicator
sensor wiring
shorts
simulation sensor simulation using ProLink II
113 using the Field Communicator
slave address, See Modbus address slug flow, See density measurement, slug flow
Smart Meter Verification automatic execution and scheduling using ProLink II
using the display
316
requirements
running a test using ProLink II
using the display
test results
interpreting
viewing using ProLink III
viewing using the Field Communicator
special measurement units
mass flow rate
status
See also alarms status alarms, See alarms
status LED
T
temperature calibration, See calibration, temperature temperature measurement
damping
effect on process measurement
measurement units
testing loop testing using ProLink II
using the display
system testing using ProLink II
totalizers
resetting
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
Index starting and stopping
transmitter communications protocols
ground
installation types
model code
transmitter interface
components
troubleshooting alarms
density measurement
discrete outputs
drive gain
frequency outputs
grounding
mA outputs
mass flow measurement
radio frequency interference (RFI)
restore factory configuration using ProLink II
status LED
system testing
volume flow measurement
two-phase flow, See density measurement, slug flow
U
Update Period
Update Rate
effect on process measurement
incompatible functions
Upper Range Value (URV)
V
volume flow measurement
cutoff
effect of density cutoff on
effect of density damping on
effect of flow damping on
effect of mass flow cutoff on
measurement units
meter factor
volume flow type gas applications
W
water calibration, See calibration, density wiring ground
grounding
power supply wiring
sensor wiring
write-protection
Z
zero procedure using ProLink II
using the display
restore factory zero using ProLink II
using the display
restore prior zero using ProLink II
using the display
Configuration and Use Manual
317
Index verification using ProLink II
318
Micro Motion ® Model 1700 Transmitters with Analog Outputs
*MMI-20019028*
MMI-20019028
Rev AA
2012
Micro Motion Inc. USA
Worldwide Headquarters
7070 Winchester Circle
Boulder, Colorado 80301
T +1 303-527-5200
T +1 800-522-6277
F +1 303-530-8459
www.micromotion.com
Micro Motion Europe
Emerson Process Management
Neonstraat 1
6718 WX Ede
The Netherlands
T +31 (0) 318 495 555
F +31 (0) 318 495 556
www.micromotion.nl
Micro Motion Asia
Emerson Process Management
1 Pandan Crescent
Singapore 128461
Republic of Singapore
T +65 6777-8211
F +65 6770-8003
Micro Motion United Kingdom
Emerson Process Management Limited
Horsfield Way
Bredbury Industrial Estate
Stockport SK6 2SU U.K.
T +44 0870 240 1978
F +44 0800 966 181
Micro Motion Japan
Emerson Process Management
1-2-5, Higashi Shinagawa
Shinagawa-ku
Tokyo 140-0002 Japan
T +81 3 5769-6803
F +81 3 5769-6844
©
2012 Micro Motion, Inc. All rights reserved.
The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson
Electric Co. Micro Motion, ELITE, ProLink, MVD and MVD Direct
Connect marks are marks of one of the Emerson Process
Management family of companies. All other marks are property of their respective owners.
Descarcă
Link public actualizat
Linkul public către chat-ul tău a fost actualizat. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Link public document
Publicitate